Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

IP-6600 Color Ink Jet Printer Maintenance Manual

U00087443802

Seiko I Infotech Inc.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

U00087444000 February 2004 U00087444001 March 2004 U00087443802 April 2005

Copyright (c) by Seiko I Infotech Inc. 2005

All rights reserved

The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS-3

CONTENTS

Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview 1-1

1.1 Maintenance Procedure Overview 1-1 1.2 Required Tools 1-2 1.3 External Views and Names of Parts 1-4 1.4 Maintenance Space 1-6

Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance 2-1

Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions 3-1

3.1 Introduction 3-1 3.2 Entering Maintenance Mode 3-2 3.3 Basic Menu Operation 3-3

3.3.1 Menu tree 3-4 3.3.2 Basic operations and keys 3-11

3.4 Menu Operation: Maintenance Mode 3-15 3.4.1 MEC. ADJ Menu 3-15 3.4.2 H. ADJ. Menu 3-19 3.4.3 H. MNTE Menu 3-23 3.4.4 RESET Menu 3-36 3.4.5 TEST-PRN. Menu 3-37 3.4.6 SYSTEM Menu 3-40 3.4.7 FEED Menu 3-46 3.4.8 MONITOR Menu 3-47 3.4.9 DIAG Menu 3-50 3.4.10 SETUP Menu 3-54 3.4.11 ACTUATOR Menu 3-55 3.4.12 FUNCTION Menu 3-59

3.4.12.1 System information print 3-60 3.4.12.2 Error log print 3-60 3.4.12.3 Cleaning history print 3-64

3.4.13 COUNTER Menu 3-65 3.5 System Information Management 3-66 3.6 Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions 3-69

3.6.1 Entering maintenance mode 3-69 3.6.2 Basic menu operation 3-69

3.6.3 Menu items 3-70

Section 4 Troubleshooting (General) 4-1

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -4

Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers) 5-1

5.1 Print Quality Defects 5-1 5.2 Error Message Types 5-4 5.3 Operator Call Errors 5-5 5.4 Warning 5-8

5.4.1 Communication errors 5-10 5.4.2 Winder timeout 5-10

5.5 Service Call Errors 5-11 5.5.1 Self-diagnostic errors at power on 5-11

5.5.1.1 Internal RAM (0001) 5-12 5.5.1.2 SRAM (0002) 5-12 5.5.1.3 Flash ROM (0004) 5-12 5.5.1.4 PIO (0008) 5-12 5.5.1.5 NVRAM 5-13 5.5.1.6 FPGA (IPB) (0020) 5-15 5.5.1.7 FPGA (ICB) (0040) 5-15 5.5.1.8 ASIC CONF (IPB1) (0080) 5-15 5.5.1.9 ASIC CONF (ICB1) (0100) 5-16 5.5.1.10 SCSI board (0200) 5-16 5.5.1.11 SCSI register (0400) 5-16 5.5.1.12 DRAM (0200) 5-17 5.5.1.13 POWER SUPPLY (+36, +24, +12 V) (800) 5-17

5.5.2 Engine error 5-19 5.5.2.1 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG block clear error 5-20 5.5.2.2 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG DMA error 5-20 5.5.2.3 Engine error 112X: Vacuum fan error 5-20 5.5.2.4 Engine error 1140: Flash ROM write error 5-21 5.5.2.5 Engine error 1150: Home position sensor error 5-21 5.5.2.6 Engine error 1160: Wiping error 5-22 5.5.2.7 Engine error 1170: Temperature sensor error 5-22 5.5.2.8 Engine error 1180: Capping motor error 5-23 5.5.2.9 Engine error 119X: VDD2 variable power supply error 5-24 5.5.2.10 Engine error 11AX: NVRAM error 5-25 5.5.2.11 Engine error 11C0: Cap position error 5-26 5.5.2.12 Engine error 11D0: Cooling fan error 5-26 5.5.2.13 Engine error 11E0: Long term strage error 5-26 5.5.2.14 Engine error 120X: Head drive IC error 5-27 5.5.2.15 Engine error 121X: Head temperature error 5-27 5.5.2.16 Engine error 1220: Edge sensor error 5-28 5.5.2.17 Engine error 123x: Sub-tank sensor error (Full or Half) 5-28 5.5.2.18 Engine error 124x: Ink supply sensor error 5-29 5.5.2.19 Engine error 125x: Sub-tank supply error 5-30 5.5.2.20 Engine error 126x: FFC cable connection error 5-31 5.5.2.21 Engine error 1700x: Servo error 5-31

5.5.3 System errors 5-33 5.6 Engine F/W composition and Version Up 5-34

5.6.1 Engine F/W Composition 5-34 5.6.2 Engine F/W Version UP 5-35

5.7 ASIC Program Composition and Version Up 5-37 5.7.1 ASIC Program Composition 5-37 5.7.2 ASIC Program Version Up 5-37

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -5

5.8 Upgrading Heater F/W 5-38 5.8.1 Heater F/W Composition 5-38 5.8.2 How to Upgrade Heater F/W 5-38

5.9 Setting During Engine Board (IPB1) Replacement 5-39 5.10 Special Power-On Procedure 5-44 5.11 Countermeasures for No Error Message 5-45 5.12 System Information Setting Operation After Head Replacement 5-46 5.13 Heater Errors 5-47

5.13.1 Heater error H01: System error 5-48 5.13.2 Heater error H02: Relay board error 5-48 5.13.3 Heater error H03: F heater temperature error. 5-48 5.13.4 Heater error H04: R heater temperature error 5-49 5.13.5 Heater error H05: P heater temperature error 5-49 5.13.6 Heater error H06: F heater time out error 5-49 5.13.7 Heater error H07: 7 R heater time out error 5-51 5.13.8 Heater error H08: P heater time out error 5-52 5.13.9 Heater error H09: Operation panel switch error 5-54 5.13.10 Heater error H10: Zero cross error 5-54

Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64) 6-1

6.1 Error Indication 6-1 6.2 Error Types and Counteractions 6-2

6.2.1 Power supply 6-2 6.2.2 Fan 6-3 6.2.3 Heater 6-7 6.2.4 Timer 6-13

6.3 Appendix 6-15 6.3.1 IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table 6-15 6.3.2 Dryer unit 64 Failure Description - Replacement Association Table 6-18

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -6

Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly) 7-1

7.1 Reading This Section 7-1 7.1.1 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure 7-1

7.2 Names of Parts 7-2 7.2.1 Names of parts and layout 7-2

7.3 Maintenance Parts Disassembly and Reassembly 7-11 7.3.1 Covers and foot assembly 7-13

7.3.1.1 Ink cartridge cover (right) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front right)) 7-13

7.3.1.2 Ink cartridge cover (left) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front left)) 7-13

7.3.1.3 Interlock microswitch 7-14 7.3.1.4 Photo sensor assembly 7-15 7.3.1.5 Operation panel assembly, panel cable 7-15 7.3.1.6 Heater panel assembly 7-16 7.3.1.7 Waste ink bottle sensor 7-16 7.3.1.8 Supply pump end sensor 7-17

7.3.2 Y drive unit 7-18 7.3.2.1 Photo sensor assembly 7-18 7.3.2.2 Carriage motor assembly, Bearing (DE-46562) 7-18 7.3.2.3 Two-step pulley assembly, synchronizing belt 7-19 7.3.2.4 Steel belt (64) 7-20 7.3.2.5 Driven pulley assembly 7-21 7.3.2.6 Pressure bracket assembly 7-22 7.3.2.7 Pressure roller 7-23 7.3.2.8 T fence 7-24 7.3.2.9 Carriage cable 64 7-25

7.3.3 X drive unit 7-27 7.3.3.1 Media feed motor assembly and deceleration belt 7-27 7.3.3.2 Adsorption fan assembly 7-28 7.3.3.3 Paper sensor assembly (front) 7-28 7.3.3.4 Paper sensor assembly (rear) 7-29 7.3.3.5 Grit roller 7-30

7.3.4 Electrical unit 7-34 7.3.4.1 Cooling fan assembly 7-34 7.3.4.2 Power supply unit 7-34 7.3.4.3 Board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIM1,

PCB-ASSY-VDD2) 7-34 7.3.4.4 Board (PCB-ASSY-RLY) 7-35

7.3.5 Carriage assembly, head unit 7-36 7.3.5.1 Head cable 64 7-38 7.3.5.2 Edge sensor assembly 7-39 7.3.5.3 PCB-ASSY-ICB1 7-40 7.3.5.4 Head ASSY, Cooling Fan 7-41 7.3.5.5 Linear encoder assembly 7-46

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -7

7.3.6 Wiping unit 7-49 7.3.6.1 Wiping unit (64) 7-49 7.3.6.2 Cleaner (wiper 64) unit 7-50 7.3.6.3 Blade (Wiper rubber 64) 7-51 7.3.6.4 Motor (wiper) assembly 7-52 7.3.6.5 Switch (wiper) assembly 7-53 7.3.6.6 Belt (wiper) 7-53

7.3.7 Capping unit 7-56 7.3.7.1 Capping unit (64) 7-56 7.3.7.2 Motor (cap) assembly 7-58 7.3.7.3 Timing belt 7-58 7.3.7.4 Solenoid 7-59 7.3.7.5 Cap assembly 7-60 7.3.7.6 Tray (ink) assembly 7-61 7.3.7.7 Torque limiter 7-62 7.3.7.8 Pump assembly 7-63 7.3.7.9 Joint (CAP Sa) 7-64

7.3.8 Ink cartridge unit 7-65 7.3.8.1 Ink box (left/right) assembly, filter assembly (Sa), and pump tube 7-65 7.3.8.2 PCB-ASSY-INK 2 7-68

7.3.9 Sub tank unit 7-69 7.3.9.1 Sub tank unit, full sensor ASSY, half full sensor ASSY. 7-69

7.3.10 Heater unit 7-71 7.3.10.1 Paper guide F (with heater) 7-71 7.3.10.2 Paper guide R (with heater) 7-71 7.3.10.3 Platen assembly 7-72

7.3.11 Winder Unit 7-73 7.3.11.1 Flange 7-73

7.3.12 Dryer 64 7-74 7.3.12.1 Circuit breaker 7-74 7.3.12.2 Relay 7-74 7.3.12.3 SSR 7-75 7.3.12.4 Power supply unit 7-75 7.3.12.5 Timer 7-76 7.3.12.6 Thermostat 7-77 7.3.12.7 THRM-CBL-ASSY 7-77 7.3.12.8 VOLSW-CBL-ASSY 7-78 7.3.12.9 FAN-ASSY 7-78 7.3.12.10 FAN (EL-BOX) 7-79 7.3.12.11 PCB-ASSY-DRY 7-79 7.3.12.12 Flange insulator 7-80 7.3.12.13 Terminal protecting insulator set 7-82

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -8

Section 8 Adjustment 8-1

8.1 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment 8-2 8.2 Head Cover Plate Adjustment 8-3 8.3 Synchronizing Belt (Y Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment 8-4 8.4 Deceleration Belt (X Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment 8-4 8.5 Wiping Unit Height Adjustment 8-5 8.6 Blade Height and Levelness Adjustment 8-6 8.7 Wiping Position Correction 8-6 8.8 Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment 8-9 8.9 Cap Position Correction 8-10 8.10 Cap Unit Height Adjustment 8-12 8.11 Shield HB Height Adjustment 8-14 8.12 Initial Ink Charge/Ink Extraction 8-15 8.13 Nozzle Check 8-17

8.13.1 Manual cleaning (the same function as the cleaning in the user mode) 8-17 8.13.2 Manual Cleaning 8-18 8.13.3 Fill Cap 8-18 8.13.4 Discharging ink 8-19 8.13.5 Cleaning with maintenance liquid cartridge 8-19

8.14 Head Drive Voltage Setting 8-20 8.15 Ink Head Adjustment Procedure 8-21 8.16 Head Position Correction (L and R) 8-31 8.17 Head Position Correction (Main) 8-34 8.18 Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction 8-37 8.19 Bi-directional Print Position (R) Correction 8-40 8.20 Paper Feed Amount Correction 8-41

8.20.1 Adjustment using “FEED PATTERN” 8-42 8.21 Head Position Correction (Main scanning direction) 8-45 8.22 Side Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ) 8-48 8.23 Top Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ) 8-50 8.24 Appendix 8-52

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -9

Section 9 Operations 9-1

9.1 System Operation Overview 9-1 9.2 Paper Transport System 9-2 9.3 Carriage Transport System 9-5 9.4 Ink System 9-7 9.5 Print Functions 9-11 9.6 Principle of Head Drive 9-15 9.7 Print Mode 9-16 9.8 IPB1 (Engine Control) Board 9-20

9.8.1 Basic configuration 9-20 9.8.2 Engine Unit Operation 9-21

9.9 Engine Control Firmware 9-27 9.9.1 Function blocks 9-27 9.9.2 Operation description 9-26

9.10 Power Supply Unit 9-28 9.10.1 Electrical specifications 9-29 9.10.2 Connector specifications 9-29 9.10.3 ON/OFF sequence 9-31 9.10.4 Others 9-31

9.11 Heater Unit 9-32 9.11.1 Block Diagram of Heater Unit 9-32 9.11.2 Heater System Electric Unit Operations 9-33 9.11.3 Heater Firmware 9-34 9.11.4 Heater wiring diagram 9-34 9.11.5 Wiring Diagram of Heater Unit 9-34 9.11.6 Heater Operations 9-35

9.12 Dryer 64 Operation Outline 9-38 9.13 Electric Configuration of Dryer 64 9-39

9.13.1 Electric Unit Operations 9-40

Appendix Appendix-1

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -10

Figure

Figure 1-1 Maintenance work flowchart 1-1 Figure 1-2 External views and names of parts (Front) 1-4 Figure 1-3 External views and names of parts (Rear) 1-5 Figure 1-4 Maintenance space 1-6 Figure 7-1 Cover Names and Layout 7-2 Figure 7-2 Cover names and layout (Dryer 64) 7-3 Figure 9-1 Outline of operation 9-1 Figure 9-2 Transport system mechanism (X axis) 9-2 Figure 9-3 Transport system mechanism (Y axis) 9-2 Figure 9-4 Ink system overview 9-7 Figure 9-5 Ink system concept 9-7 Figure 9-6 Head drive principle 9-15 Figure 9-7 Basic hardware configuration 9-20 Figure 9-8 SCSI/Engine F/W function block 9-27 Figure 9-9 Power ON/OFF state transition 9-31 Figure 9-10 Principal of dryer 64 operation 9-38 Figure 9-11 Block diagram of dryer 64 electric unit 9-39

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -11

Table

Table 1-1 List of required tools 1-2 Table 5-1 Booting Action List 5-43 Table 7-1 Maintenance part names (Cover) 7-4 Table 7-2 Maintenance parts names (Foot assembly) 7-4 Table 7-3 Maintenance parts names (Y drive unit) 7-5 Table 7-4 Maintenance parts names (X drive unit) 7-6 Table 7-5 Maintenance parts names (Power unit) 7-6 Table 7-6 Maintenance parts names (Carriage head unit) 7-7 Table 7-7 Maintenance parts names (Wiping unit) 7-7 Table 7-8 Maintenance parts names (Capping unit) 7-8 Table 7-9 Maintenance parts names (Ink cartridge unit) 7-8 Table 7-10 Maintenance parts names (Sub tank unit) 7-9 Table 7-11 Maintenance parts names (Winder unit) 7-9 Table 7-12 Maintenance parts names (cables) 7-9 Table 7-13 Maintenance parts names (Jigs) 7-10 Table 7-14 Maintenance parts (Dryer 64) 7-10

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

CONTENTS -12

（Blank page）

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

1-1

Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

This section describes the primary maintenance procedure, necessary tools and the names of parts of the printer.

1.1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

Maintenance is divided into periodic inspection and maintenance based on a maintenance contract and non-periodic maintenance which is performed when a trouble occurs.

A flowchart of each type of maintenance is shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Maintenance work flowchart

Maintenance that is performed when a problem occurs

Start

Periodic inspection/When a problem occurs Periodic inspection

and maintenance

Check the state of the plotter (problem, complaint, etc.).

Check or clean parts. => Section 2 Replace parts if necessary (=> Section 6), or perform adjustment (=> Section 7).

Print a drawing to verify that there is noproblem.

End

Confirm the details of the problem and the situation in which it occurred.

Perform troubleshooting.- If the SCSI controller seems to be defective

=> Section 5 - General problem or defective print quality

=> Section 4

Replace defective parts. => Section 6 Replace parts or perform adjustment if necessary. => Section 7

Verify that the problem has been eliminated.

End

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

1-2

1.2 Required Tools

Table 1-1 lists the tools and measuring equipment required for maintenance.

Table 1-1 List of required tools (1/2)

Name Quanitity Remarks

Phillips screwdriver (2 bits) 1 Commercially available product

Phillips screwdriver (1 bit) 1 Encoder removal, commercially available product

Phillips torque driver (2 bits) 1 Head unit installation (5 kg), commercially available product

Stabilized screwdriver (2 bits) 1 Commercially available product

Normal screwdriver 1 For removing E rings, commercially available product

Normal precision screwdriver 1 For removing E rings, commercially available product

Hexagonal bar spanner 1 Commercially available product

Spanner or long-nose pliers 1 For removing E rings, commercially available product

Nippers 1 Commercially available product

Tester 1 For power supply voltage measurement, commercially available product

Metal scale (JIS 1 class precision) 1 For head unit adjustment, 300 mm or more, commercially available product

Tube cutter 1 Commercially available product

Cutter knife 1 Commercially available product

Cable binder 1 Commercially available product

Magnifier with scale (M830-S or equivalent) 1 Peak statt microscope x 100: No. 2008-100 (Scale: standard)

Thermometer and hygrometer 1 For unit installation environment check, commercially available product

Synchronous belt, deceleration belt grease 1 Tow cosing Asia EM-60L or equivalent (Silicon grease can be substituted.)

IC card for rewriting engine F/W ROM 1 Fujitsu: MB98A81183-15 (U00045781700) Fujisoku: JF4096A3-R06A (U00055389300)

Gloves or finger sack 1 set For ink stain protection Commercially available product

Cleaning paper As

required For ink stain clraning, kim wipe or equivalent

Wipe stick As

required For cleaning front down surface of the carriage

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

1-3

Table 1-1 List of required tools (2/2)

Name Quanitity Remarks

Cleaning Liquid As required

Ethanol

200 g (1.96 N) push/pull spring scale 1 - SUS belt tension adjustment (push)

10 kg (98 N) push/pull spring scale 1 - X motor belt tension adjustment (pull) - Y motor belt tension adjustment (pull)

1 kg (9.8 N) push/pull spring scale 1 - Pressure roller grip power measurement (pull)

Clearance gauge 1 0.2～0.5mm

Platen squareness/height adjustment jig 1 - Platen squareness adjustment - Platen height (level) adjustment - Wiping unit height adjustment

Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig 1 - Carriage height adjustment - Carriage parallelism adjustment

Head position adjustment jig 1 set Head incliration and position adjustment

Head positioning pin (short) 1 -

Head positioning pin (long) 1 -

Head positioning reference plate 1 -

Head positioning reference jig 1 1 -

Head positioning reference jig 2 1 -

- screw driver (short) 1 -

+ screw driver (long) 1 -

Offset latchet screwdriver 1 set Y rail cover mounting screw removal

Cap cleaning liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit

Wiper cleaning liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit

Cleaning swab 1 set Daily maintenance kit

Syringes 1 set Daily maintenance kit

Maintenance liquid cartridge 6 -

Dammy cartridge 6 -

Cleaning liquid cartridge 6 -

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

1-4

1.3 External Views and Names of Parts

The externals and names of parts of the printer are shown in Figures 1-2 and 1-3.

①Operation panel

The lamps and LCD, which indicate the printer status, and keys for setting functions are located on the operation panel.

②Heater control panel The keys for setting heater temperature are located on the heater control panel.

③Ink holder Holds the ink cartridge. ④Flange Sets paper roll. ⑤Caster Unlocks the caster to move the printer, and lock it to secure the printer. ⑥Paper pressure alternation lever Alternates paper pressure depending on the paper thickness. ⑦Pressure roller up/down lever Presses down the paper after inserting the paper into the paper supplying

part and releases the pressing down of the paper. ⑧Paper-out release lever (ME lever)

Releases paper-out detection sensor.

Figure 1-2 External views and names of parts (Front)

③

<Front of the printer>

Ink cartridge

Roll paper

Lock Unlock

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

1-5

<Rear of the printer>

Figure 1-3 External views and names of parts (Rear)

⑨Power receptacle ⑩Printer switch Printer power supply

⑰Power receptacle ⑱Heater switch Heater power

⑪Rear cover ⑲100 V/200 V alternation switch supply

⑫SCSI connector ⑳Cap cover

⑬ID switch SCSI controller Wiper cover

⑭Terminator switch Print stop/restart, cancel keys ⑮Paper outlet FAN guard slide lever ⑯Waste ink bottle Head up/down lever

22

21

23

24

Winding roll

SCSI controller Network controller

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

1-6

1.4 Maintenance Space

The space required for maintaining the plotter is shown in Figure 1-4.

Height direction: 1700 (Unit: mm)

Figure 1-4 Maintenance space

(Front)

400 400 10

00

1000

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-1

Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance

We recommend that maintenance and inspection should be performed to keep the printer performance in the best condition.

The maintenance mode is used to carry out maintenance and inspection.

Parts should be adjusted and checked as required during inspection and maintenance.

The following inspection and maintenance procedures must be followed:

・ Maintenance mode menu operations and functions : Section 3

・ Troubleshooting: Sections 4, 5 and 6

・ Replacement parts information and disassembly/reassembly procedures: Section 7

・ Adjustment: Section 8

Details of inspection and maintenance are described in the subsequent pages.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-2

■ Daily inspection and maintenance The wiper sponge needs to be dampened periodically. Keep it damp by replenishing a dropping pipet full of wiper cleaning fluid.

1 Capping Unit Cleaning Enter to the SERVICE menu and select “CAP CLEANING” on the operation panel.

The head carriage will move to the wiper side and you can access easily to the capping unit.

Open the rear cover and cap cover. Wipe up the edge and periphery of the upper surface of all (six) caps with the cotton swab.

Close the cap cover and rear cover. The head carriage will return to the capping unit position (home position) automatically.

#CAP CLEANING >

- Do not leave the printer for long time in the condition that the head carriage is not on the capping unit.

NOTE

Carriage cover

Rear cover

Clean he edge and periphery of the upper surface of the cap.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance

2-3

2 Wiper Blade Cleaning Enter to the “SERVICE” menu and select “WIPE CLEANING” on the operation panel.

The wiper blade will come up for cleaning.

Open the rear cover and the wiper cover.

Clean the front and back of the blades with the swab infiltrated into the wiper cleaning liquid.

After completion of the cleaning, close the wipe cover and the rear cover to return the wiper to the position as it was.

#WIPER CLEANING >

Wiper cover

Rear cover

Wiper blades

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-4

3 Wiper sponge cleaning The wiper sponge needs to be dampened periodically. Keep it damp by replenishing a dropping pipet full of wiper cleaning fluid.

4 Test Print

Enter to the “ADJUST” menu and select “TEST PRINT” on the operation panel.

Check no print dot-off and missing. Perform the test print as the 1st time print on every day and especially after cap cleaning for head cleaning.

When the print dot-off occurs at test print, enter to the “CLEANING” menu and select “SLIGHT.” (“NORMAL” for the engine F/W V1.**)

5 Waste Ink Bottle Disposal Pour the waste ink into the proper container you prepared and make the waste ink bottle empty.

■ Every one month inspection and maintenance 1 Head Cleaning

Clean the head one time per a month according to the documentation attached to the head cleaner kit.

■ When leaving the printer for a long time (more than 2 weeks) in power off state

Store the printer after cleaning the head and ink path with the maintenance liquid and charging the maintenance liquid.

Six maintenance liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory.

Use the storage kit (IP6-137). The storage kit contains 6 maintenance fluid cartridges (IP6-107) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118). All of six maintenance fluid cartridges should be used for one service clean operation.

- Do not leave the head carriage at the position other than on the capping unit for a long time (more than 5 minutes).

NOTE

Wiper sponge

Syringe


2-5

1 Checking waste ink bottle Empty the waste ink bottle.

2 Service Clean Enter to the “SERVICE” menu and select “SERVICE CLEAN.”

Upon completion of service clean, turn off the power with the maintenance fluid cartridge mounted, and leave the printer for a while.

The head wash operation is mandatory when returning the printer from the status that the service clean is performed.

■ When returning the printer from a long time leaving (more than 2 weeks)

Perform the cleaning of the head and ink path with cleaning liquid.

Six cleaning liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory.

Use the cleaning kit (IP6-117). The cleaning kit contains 6 cleaning fluid cartridges (IP6-119) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118).

All of six cleaning fluid cartridges should be used for one head wash operation.

#SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN

When the printer is left turned off for more than one month (31 days), the flag needs to be cleared to prevent engine error 11E0. The flag is cleared by entering the maintenance mode.

<Entering the Engine Maintenance mode>

1. Turn on the power by pressing the POWER key while pressing down and .

2. Press the , , , and keys in order in the password input screen.

3. Turn off the power. 4. Turn on the power in the normal procedure.

When the printer is left for a prolonged period of time without the maintenance fluid being replenished, the ink will dry up and harden in the ink supply pump, tubes, or caps. Be sure to refill the maintenance fluid. Opening or closing the rear cover or levers should be avoided while service

clean is in progress, or the operation may have to be restarted from thebeginning, resulting in the waste of maintenance fluid. If service clean is to berestarted, new maintenance fluid cartridges are required.

NOTE

MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD ?

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-6


2 Head Wash Select HEAD WASH in SERVICE menu on the operation panel.

After performing the head wash, charge the ink (See Ink Charge after Head Washing).

3 Ink Charge After Head Washing Charge the ink after head washing before printing when the printer is leaved for a long time.

Enter to “SERVICE” menu and select “INK CHARGE” on the operation panel.

Insert the ink cassettes and charge the ink.

Leave the printer for at least one hour after completion of ink charging. And then perform the test print.

When the print dot-off is found in the test print, select “SLIGHT” in the Cleaning menu (“NORMAL” for the engine F/W V1.**)..

The printer performs fill cap operation to keep the good head condition atfirst 20 hours after print wait state and every 3 days. It is recommended to keep the printer ON except when the printer is notused for a long time. Avoid leaving the printer with no ink for one month or more for headprotection.

When the printer is left for a prolonged period of time without themaintenance fluid being replenished, the ink will dry up and harden in the ink supply pump, tubes, or caps. Check hardened ink when restarting the printer. If the ink hardened, wash it out or replace the part containing the hardened ink prior to head wash. Carry out daily maintenance prior to head wash. The wiper sponge may harden by waste ink. Apply 5 pipets of wiper cleaningfluid in the day before the head wash operation.

Do not open and close the rear cover and do not lift and push down the levers during service cleaning and head washing. If doing so, the printer may start service cleaning and head washing from the beginning.

NOTE

#SERVICE >HEAD WASH

#SERVICE >INK CHARGE


2-7

■ When returning the printer from a long time leaving (within 2 weeks) in power off state.


2 Head Wash Perform the cleaning of the head and ink path with cleaning liquid.

Six cleaning liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory.

Use the cleaning kit (IP6-117) for head wash. The cleaning kit contains 6 cleaning fluid cartridges (IP6-119) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118).

All of six cleaning fluid cartridges should be used for one head wash operation.

After performing the head wash, charge the ink.

#SERVICE >HEAD WASH

FILL CAP is performed after 20 hours since the printer moves to standby to keep the good head condition. After that, FILL CAP is carried out every three days.

When the maintenance fluid is not replenished for a prolonged period of time, the ink will dry up and harden in the ink supply pump, tube, or cap. Be sure to refill the maintenance fluid when restarting the printer. If ink hardened inside these parts, wash it out or replace the parts. Carry out daily maintenance prior to head wash.

The wiper sponge may harden by waste ink. Apply 5 pipets of wiper cleaning fluid in the day before the head wash operation.

Do not open and close the rear cover and do not lift and push down the levers during service cleaning and head washing. If doing so, the printer may start service cleaning and head washing from the beginning.

NOTE

Approximately 200 cc of ink is filled in one ink charge operation. If the ink level of the cartridge mounted is lower than 250 cc, replacement is indicated. Mount a cartridge containing more than 250 cc (25%, or 50% for the starter kit).

NOTE

(Blank Page)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-1

Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

3.1 Introduction

The operation panel functions of this printer are divided as follows:

- User mode: operation panel functions used by general users

- Maintenance mode: operation panel functions used for factory adjustment and field maintenance

The heater panel functions of this printer are described in 3.7 Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu and Functions.

This section describes only the operations in the maintenance mode for factory adjustment and field maintenance.

For information on the operations in the user mode for general users, see the User's Guide.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-2

3.2 Entering Maintenance Mode

The maintenance mode is designed for factory adjustment and field maintenance by maintenance personnel.

There are two methods to enter the maintenance mode.

(1) When the interface board (controller) is mounted.

• Press the , , , and keys in this order in the offline user mode, and enter the password to enter the maintenance mode.

(2) When the interface board (controller) is not mounted. (engine start)

• The maintenance mode is invoked by entering the password. <When the interface board is mounted> <When the interface board is not mounted>

* Passwards for operaters Operater Password

Field service personnel

Press the , , and keys in this order.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

3-3

3.3 Basic Menu Operation

There are the following menu groups in the engine maintenance mode, and they can be switched by pressing the key.

The menu has the following hierarchical structure:

<Menu group> This menu is displayed at the first level. Some menus have several sub-menus.

<Second-level and third-level menus> Sub-menus of the menu group

<Parameters> Select a selected menu item or enter a value. There are three methods: choice input, value entry, and execution.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-4

3.3.1 Menu tree

Top menu ((first-level menu) Second-level menu Third-level menu Parameter

ADJUST PATTERN - Choice input - TOP & BTM ADJ - FEED ADJ

Choice input

FEED PATTERN －

- ROUGH (NORMAL) - ROUGH (H-QUAL) - ROUGH (H-DENS) - ROUGH (DRAFT) - DETAIL (NORMAL) - DETAIL (H-QUAL) - DETAIL (H-DENS) - DETAL (DRAFT) - DETAIL2 (NORMAL) - DETAIL2 (H-QUAL) - DETAIL2 (H-DENS) - DETAIL2 (DRAFT)

CHECK PATTERN - Execution CAP POSITION - Value entry WIPE POSITION - Value entry ▲：MEC. ADJ SENSOR (TOP) ADJ - Value entry SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ - Value entry BASE Value entry PAPER (*1) Value entry FEED ADJUST Glossy (*1) Matte (*1) Banner (*1) BLT_B (*1)

BACK PATTERN － - NORMAL - H-QUALITY - H-DENSITY - DRAFT

BASE Value entry PAPER (*1) Value entry BACK ADJUST Glossy (*1) Value entry Matte (*1) Value entry Banner (*1) Value entry BLT_B (*1) Value entry Choice input NOZZLE - HEAD ADJ1 - HEAD ADJ2 - LEFT/RIGHT - HEAD POS H ADJ PATTERN - - HEAD POS L ：H. ADJ. - HEAD POS R - ADJ 1-1 - ADJ 1-2 - ADJ 1-3

- ADJ 2-1 - ADJ 2-1

Choice input MOVE CARRIAGE － - HOME - CAP - CENTER - WIPE


3-5

Top menu (first-level menu) Second-level menu Third-level menu Parameter

Bk Value entry Lm Value entry L-R ADJ Lc Value entry Y Value entry M Value entry C Value entry Lm Value entry Lc Value entry H-POS. ADJ. Y Value entry M Value entry C Value entry

SELECT I-POS

-

- BASE - PAPER - Glossy - Matte - Banner - BLT-B

(*1) Bk Value entry Lm Value entry Lc Value entry I-POS (L) XXXXXX (*2) Y Value entry M Value entry

C Value entry

Bk Value entry

Lm Value entry

Lc Value entry

Y Value entry

M Value entry

I-POS (R) XXXXXX (*2)

C Value entry

Bk (L) Value entry

Bk (R) Value entry

Lm (L) Value entry

Lm (R) Value entry

Lc (L) Value entry

Lc (R) Value entry

Y (L) Value entry

Y (R) Value entry

M (L) Value entry

M (R) Value entry

C (L) Value entry

DRIVE VOLTAGE

C (R) Value entry

：H. ADJ.

LINE WIDTH CHECK PATTERN - Execution

(*1) The registered media names are displayed (registered media other than the preset ones are also listed).

(*2) XXXXXX is the medium name selected in the I-POS selection.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-6

Top menu

(first-level menu) Second-level menu Third-level menu Parameter

INK CHARGE - Choice input - ALL - LEFT - RIGHT

INK EXTRACT - Choice input - ALL - LEFT - RIGHT

SERVICE -

Choice input - SERVICE CLEAN 1 - SERVICE CLEAN 2 - HEAD WASH

▼：H. MNTE AUTO CLEANING - Choice input - ON - OFF

INK CHAGE MODE - Choice input - NOT YET - FINISHED

CLEANING -

Choice input - NORMAL - SLIGHT - STRONG

CAP OPEN - Execution CAP CLOSE - Execution ：RESET - - -

EXECUTE Execution

DIRECTION

Choice input - UNI - BI

Bk Choice input - ON - OFF

C Choice input - ON - OFF

M Choice input - ON - OFF

Y Choice input - ON - OFF

Lc Choice input - ON - OFF

Lm Choice input - ON - OFF

MODE

Choice input - 070410 - 070810 - 070811 - 030210

LENGTH Value entry

PATTERN 0

COUNT Value entry PATTERN 1 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 2 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 3 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 4 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 5 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 6 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 7 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 8 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 9 - Same as PATTERN 0 Color, line length, and pages

are defined separatrly. PATTERN 10 - Same as PATTERN 0 - PATTERN 11 - Same as PATTERN 0 Color, line length, and pages

are defined separatrly.

▲：TEST-PRN

PATTERN 12 - Same as PATTERN 0 -


3-7

Top menu


-

LANGUAGE

Choice input - ENGLISH - JAPANESE

SYSTEM DATE - Value entry

SYSTEM TIME - Value entry

SERIAL NO. - Value entry

NVRAM INIT - Value entry

SAVE SETTING - Value entry

RESTORE SETTING - Value entry

SAVE NVRAM - Value entry

RESTORE NVRAM - Value entry

BOOT VERSION - Execution (Display)

F/W VERSION - Execution (Display)

IPB VERSION - Execution (Display)

WIM VERSION - Execution (Display)

ICB VERSION - Execution (Display)

ASIC VERSION - Execution (Display)

HEAT HW VERSION - Execution (Display)

HEAT FW VERSION - Execution (Display)

：SYSTEM

F/W VERSION - Value entry

▼：FEED - - -

EDGE Execution (Display)

FEED Execution (Display)

EXIT Execution (Display)

HOME POSITION Execution (Display)

WIPE Execution (Display)

LEVER Execution (Display)

INTERLOCK-L Execution (Display)

INTERLOCK-R Execution (Display)

ENGINE SENSOR

HEAD END Execution (Display)

INK1 ON Execution (Display)






INK COVER-L Execution (Display)

▲：MONITOR

INK SENSOR

INK COVER-R Execution (Display)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-8

Top menu


FULL1 Execution (Display)






HALF1 Execution (Display)






INK SUPPLY1 Execution (Display)





SUB TANK SENSOR


WASTE BOTTLE INSTALL Execution (Display)

SLACK Execution (Display)

SWITCH1 Execution (Display) WIND UNIT

SWITCH2 Execution (Display)

ENV. Execution (Display)

HEAD 1 Execution (Display)






CRG 1 Execution (Display)






THERMISTOR



3-9

Top menu


FLASH ROM - Execution PI0 - Execution NVRAM - Execution CARRIAGE I/F - Execution INK EEPROM - Execution SCSI DATA - Execution ATG - Execution DRAM - Execution RSM - Execution PTC - Execution PDD - Execution ALL - Execution

VDD 24V 17V 6V

Execution

DISPLAY Execution (Display)

：DIAG

PANEL KEY Input

POWER SAVE - Choice input

- ON - OFF ▼：SETUP

SCSI DRIVER - Choice input

- NORMAL - COMPATIBLE

- - MOVE CARRIAGE -

Choice input - HOME - CAP - CENTER - WIPE

- - PF MOTOR -

Choice input - OFF - FORWARD - REWIND

- - PUMP MOTOR -

Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE

- - WIPE MOTOR -

Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE

- PUMP SOLENOID 1 -

Choice input - OFF - ON

PUMP SOLENOID 2 - Choice input

- OFF - ON

FAN MOTOR 1 - Choice input

- OFF - ON


- OFF - ON


- OFF - ON

COOL FAN - Choice input

- OFF - ON

HEAD COOL FAN - Choice input

- OFF - ON

：ACTUATOR

WIND MOTOR - Choice input

- OFF - ON

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-10

Top menu


ISM1

- Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE

ISM2


ISM3


ISM4


ISM5


ISM6


WIND MOTOR

Choice input - OFF - ON

SYSTEM PRINT - Execution

ERROR LOG PRINT - Execution ▲：FUNCTION

HISTRY PRINT - Execution

MACHINE COUNT - Value entry

PAPER COUNT A3 - Value entry




：COUNTER

PAPER COUNT 36" - Value entry


3-11

3.3.2 Basic operations and keys

Operation panel key functions are listed in the table below.

Key First-level (Top menu) Second-level Third-level Parameter settings

Transfers to the online state

Transfers to the online state (When the state rturns to the offline after transfering to the online, the state will be in top menu.)



Changes the menu group

X X X

X (*1) X X

The state returns to the third-level or the cecond-level.

X X

Determines the menu and transfers to the parameter settings.

Determines the parameter or executes the action.

Selects a menu Returns to the first-level.

Returns to the second-level.

Choice inpt: X Execution: X Vale entry: Moving a digit

Selects a menu Goes to third-level X

Choice inpt: X Execution: X Vale entry: Moving a digit

▲ Selects a menu Selects a same level menu.

Selects a same level menu.

Selects a same level menu.(Parameter)

▼ Selects a menu Selects a same level menu.

Selects a same level menu.

Selects a same level menu (Parameter).

Remote power off

Transfers to the shut down state.



(*1) : ”x” indicates an invalid key.

(1) Menu group selection

- Select a menu group directly with , , , and keys.

- Switch between menu group screens with the key.

(2) Menu selection

- , keys: Change between menus at the same level.

- , key: Change menu levels. The key moves to a higher-level menu, and the key, to a lower-level menu.

- key: Select a menu to change parameters.

(3) Parameter setting or change

- , keys: Switch between parameters. Increment or decrement a value when it is entered.

- , keys: Shift digit when entering a value.

(4) Parameter setting or canceling:

- key: Determine a parameter.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-12

- key: Cancel an input parameter value and return to menu selection.

(5) Setting save

- Changes are automatically saved in parameters.

(6) End of setting

- When the key is pressed, the printer goes back to online mode.


3-13

For information on two-level choice input, value input, and execution operation procedures,see the Section 3, Menu Operations, of the User's Guide.

This section explains the three-level menu structure.

<Example: If the parameter of the third-level menu structure is value entry type>

The PAPER FEED ADJ. menu on the MEC. ADJ menu is given as an example.

(1) Select a menu group with , , , keys. Select MEC. ADJ menu with key.

(2) Select a second-level menu group with , keys. Select DRIVE VOLTAGE here.

(3) Press key to move to the third-level menu.

Select a third-level menu item with , keys. Select Lm (R) here.

(4) Press key to change parameters. Select Lm (R) here.

(5) Move to the digit to be modified with , keys.

(6) Press , keys to modify the digit.

(7) Press key to change the parameter value and return to the condition in (3).

Note: indicates that the part blinks inversely.

▲ MEC. ADJ H. M NTE ▼ H. ADJ. RESET

# DRIVE VOLTAGE

# Lm (R) > 17.0 V

# DRIVE VOLTAGE

# Lm (R)

# DRIVE VOLTAGE # Lm (R) * 17.0 V


# DRIVE VOLTAGE

# Lm (R) * 17.2 V


SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-14

<Display format: The second-level format (The first-level - the third-level - parameter setting)>

Note: The top of the parameter becomes ">" (setting display state) or "*" (changeable state).

<Display format: The third-level format (The first-level - the third-level – parameter setting)>

Note 1: The top of the parameter becomes ">" (setting display state) or "*" (changeable state).

Note 2: The lower column consists of the third-level menu display: 8 characters (include ">".) (When the third-level menu consists of more than 8 characters, ">" position is shifted back.)

# The third-level menu > Parameter

# The second-level menu

# The third-level menu>parameter


3-15

3.4 Menu Operation: Maintenance Mode

3.4.1 MEC. ADJ Menu

Sets mechanical adjustment parameters.

When the key is pressed, mechanical adjustment parameters can be set.

(1) Adjustment pattern print (ADJUST PATTERN)

Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for mechanical adjustment.

<Parameters (choice input)> - TOP & BTM ADJ : Top & bottom adjustment pattern

(2) Feed Pattern (FEED PATTERN)

Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for paper feed adjustment.

<Parameters (choice input)> - ROUGH (NORMAL) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in

99.0 to 101.1% range. (Standard 4-pass print) - ROUGH (H-QUAL) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in

99.0 to 101.1% range. (High quality 8-pass print) - ROUGH (H-DENS) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in

99.0 to 101.1% range. (High density 8-pass print) - ROUGH (DRAFT) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in

99.0 to 101.1% range. (Draft 2-pass print) - DETAIL (NORMAL) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in

the current setting value ±0.12% range. (Standard 4-pass print)

- DETAIL (H-QUAL) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value ±0.12% range. (High quality 8-pass print)

- DETAIL (H-DENS) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value ±0.12% range. (High density 8-pass print)

- DETAIL (DRAFT) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value ±0.12% range. (Draft 2-pass print)

- DETAIL2 (NORMAL) : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (NORMAL) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (NORMAL) 's.

- DETAIL2 (H-QUAL) : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (H-QUAL) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (H-QUAL) 's.

- DETAIL2 (H-DENS) : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (H-DENS) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (H-DENS) 's.

- DETAIL2 (DRAFT) : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (DRAFT) 's. One

▲MEC. ADJ H. A DJ ▼

H.MNTE RESET

# ADJUST PATTERN

> TOP & BOTTOM

# FEED PATTERN

> ROUGH1 (NORMAL)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-16

pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (DRAFT) 's.

Note) Use ROUGH (NORMAL), DETAIL (NORMAL) or DETAIL2 (NORMAL) for adjustments in high speed mode.

(3) Check pattern (CHECK PATTERN)

Prints a check pattern.

<Parameter (Execution)> None

(4) Cap position correction value (CAP POSITION)

Inputs a correction value for the capping unit position.

<Parameter (Value input)> +X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm)

(5) Wiping position correction value (WIPE POSITION)

Inputs a correction value for the wiping unit position.

<Parameter (Value input)> ±X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm)

(6) Top margin position correction value (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ)

Inputs a correction value for the top margin position according to the print results of the top & bottom adjustment pattern.


(7) Side margin position correction value (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ)

Inputs a correction value for the side margin position according to the print results of the top & bottom adjustment pattern.


# CHECK PATTERN

>

# CAP POSITION

> +0.0 mm

# WIPE POSITION

> +0.0 mm

# SENSOR (TOP) ADJ

> +0.0 mm

# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ

> +0.0 mm


3-17

(8) Paper feed correction value (FEED ADJ (BASE))

Inputs a correction value for the base media.

<Sab-menus> # BASE : Inputs a basical correction value for media feed. The correction

value is reflected to the preset media's feeding. (It does not affect the deleted media.)

Note: Preset media can be changed by the user. Use this setting only for manufacturing process.

# PAPER : Inputs a correction value for PAPER feeding. # Glossy : Inputs a correction value for Glossy feeding. # Matte : Inputs a correction value for Matte feeding. # Banner : Inputs a correction value for Banner feeding. # BLT_B : Inputs a correction value for BLT_B feeding.

Note: The registered media name is displayed for the media name. The number of selections changes according to registration and delection of media.

<Parameter (Value input)> xxx.xx% (097.00 to 103.00%)

(9) Media back feed adjustment pattern

Prints for adjustmenting the media back feed..

<Parameters (choice input)> - NORMAL : Prints by the standard 4-pass print - H-QUAL : Prints by the high quality 8-pass print - H-DENS : Prints by the high density 8-pass print - DRAFT : Prints by the draft 2-pass print

Note) Use NORMAL for adjustments in high-speed mode.

(10) Paper back feed correction (unit: pulse)

Inputs a media back feed correction value. Inputs a correction value based on the media

back feed adjustment pattern.

<Sab-menus> # BASE : Inputs a basical correction value for media back feed. The

correction value is reflected to the preset media's feeding.

Note: Use this setting only for manufacturing process.

# PAPER : Inputs a correction value for PAPER. # Glossy : Inputs a correction value for Glossy. # Matte : Inputs a correction value for Matte.

# FEED ADJ

> BASE >099 .80%

# BACK PATTERN

> NORMAL

# BACK ADJUST

> BASE >+0000

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-18

# Banner : Inputs a correction value for Banner. # BLT_B : Inputs a correction value for BLT_B.


<Parameter (Value input)> ±2000P (±5 mm) 1 pulse = 2.5 µm


3-19

3.4.2 H. ADJ. Menu

Sets head adjustment parameters.

When the key is pressed, head adjustment parameters can be adjusted.

(1) Head adjustment pattern print (H ADJ PATTERN)

Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for head adjustment.

Press the key during print to stop the printing.

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - NOZZLE : Prints a nozzle check pattern. - HEAD ADJ1 : Prints a head adjustment pattern. - HEAD ADJ2 : Prints a head adjustment check pattern. - LEFT/RIGHT : Prints a left/right position adjustment pattern. - HEAD POS : Prints a head position adjustment pattern. - HEAD POS : Prints a head position adjustment pattern. - INK POS R : Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern R. - ADJ1-1 : Prints an left/right position adjustment pattern of

HEAD ADJ1. - ADJ1-2 : Prints an inter-head position adjustment pattern of

HEAD ADJ1. - ADJ1-3 : Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern of HEAD

ADJ1. - ADJ2-1 : Prints phase, left/right, and inter-head adjustment

patterns of HEAD ADJ2. - ADJ2-2 : Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern of HEAD

ADJ2.

(2) Carriage movement (MOVE CARRIAGE)

Used to move the carriage when adjusting an installed head.

Cap=Move the carriage to the cap position (do not perform capping).

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - HOME : Detects home position and move the carriage to the home position. - CAP : Moves the carriage to the capping position. - CENTER : Moves the carriage to the center. - WIPE : Moves the carriage to the wiping position.

▲MEC. ADJ H. A DJ ▼

H.MNTE RESET

# H ADJ PATTERN

> NOZZLE OK?

# MOVE CARRIAGE > HOME

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-20

(3) Head right and left correction value (L-R ADJ)

Adjusts the right and left nozzle position of each head.

Inputs a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.

<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the right and left position of Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. - # M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. - # Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. - # C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head.

<Parameter (Value input)> - +00: -32 to +31 (Unit: 1 dot) - A: A to H (Unit: 1/8 dot) [Common to all menus]

(4) Head position correction value (H-POS. ADJ.)

Adjusts the head position in the main scanning direction of each head. Input a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.

<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the Lm head position. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the Lc head position. - # M : Inputs a correction value for the M head position. - # Y : Inputs a correction value for the Y head position. - # C : Inputs a correction value for the C head position.


(5) Media selection for reciplocating print position setting

Selects a target medium for reciplocating print position correction.

<Parameter (choice entry) > Sets a correction value for back feed of the basic medium. BASE : Selects a basical media. When a basical correction value is

input in (6) menu, the correction value is reflected to the preset media. (It does not affect the deleted media.)

Note: Use this setting only for manufacturing process.

PAPER : Selects PAPER as basical media. Glossy : Selects Glossy as basical media. Matte : Selects Matte as basical media. Banner : Selects Banner as basical media. BLT_B : Selects BLT_B as basical media.

# L-R ADJ

# BK >+00 & A

# H-POS ADJ

# Lm >+00 & A

# SELECT I-POS

> BASE


3-21


(6) Ink position correction value (I-POS. ADJ.)

Adjusts the ink position (L) of each head for the selected media. Input a correction value

according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.

<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. - # M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. - # Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. - # C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head.


(7) Ink position correction value (I-POS. ADJ.)（R）

Adjusts the ink position (R) of each head for the selected media. Input a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.

<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. - # M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. - # Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. - # C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head.


(8) Set the drive voltage of each head. (DRIVE VOLTAGE)

Input the drive voltage of each head. (Note: Set both right and left value for each head.)

<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the left Bk head. - # Bk (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the left Bk head. - # Lc (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the right Lc head. - # Lc (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the right Lc head. - # Lm (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the Lm head. - # Lm (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the Lm head.

# I-POS L xxxxxx

# BK >+00 & A XXXXXX: Media name selected in (5).

# I-POS R xxxxxx

# BK >+00 & A

XXXXXX: Media name selected in (5).

# DRIVE VOLTAGE

# BK (L) >16.0 V

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-22

- # C (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the C head. - # C (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the C head. - # M (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the M head. - # M (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the M head. - # Y (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the Y head. - # Y (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the Y head.

<Parameter (Value input)> xx.x V (12.0 to 20.0 V, in 0.1 V units) [Common to all menus]

(9) Line width check pattern print

Prints a pattern (4-dot grid) to check the line width in each color in the assembly process. Press the key to stop printing.


# LINE WIDTH CHECK PATTERN>


3-23

3.4.3 H. MNTE Menu

Fills ink initially and clean heads.

When the key is pressed, the parameters can be set.

(1) Initial ink filling (INK CHARGE)

Fills ink initially.

<Parameter (Choice input)> - ALL : Fills ink initially for all 6 colors. - LEFT : Fills ink initially for left side 3 colors (Bk, Lc, Lm). - RIGHT : Fills ink initially for right side 3 colors (C, M, Y).

(2) Ink drain (INK EXTRACT)

Drains ink.

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - ALL : Drains ink initially for all 6 colors. - LEFT : Drains ink initially for left side 3 colors (Lm, Lc, Bk). - RIGHT : Drains ink initially for right side 3 colors (Y, M, C).

(3) Service cleaning (SERVICE)

Performs the service cleaning.

<Parameter (choice input & execution)> - SERVICE CLEAN : Cleans the printer head and the ink path with the

maintenance liquid in the state that the ink is killed into the printer.

Use this for long time storage in filled up state of the maintenance liquid.

- HEAD WASH : Use this when you make the printer print ready state after long time storage.

Clean the head with the cleaning liquid.

▲MEC. ADJ H. ADJ▼

H.MNTE RESET

# INK CHARGE

> ALL

# INK EXTRACT

> ALL

# SERVICE

> SERVICE CLEAN1

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-24

(4) Automatic cleaning (AUTO CLEANING)

Sets whether to perform automatic cleaning.

<Parameter (Choice input)> [Initial value: ON] - OFF : Do not perform automatic cleaning. - ON : Performs automatic cleaning.

(5) Ink fill mode (INK CHARGE MODE)

Indicates whether ink filling is completed. The state can be changed.

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - FINISHED : Ink filling is completed. - NOT YET : Ink is not filled.

(6) Cleaning (CLEANING)

Cleans heads.

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - NORMAL : Cleaning 1 (Ordinary cleaning) - SLIGHT : Cleaning 2 (Slight cleaning) - STRONG : Cleaning 3 (Powerful cleaning)

(7) Cap open (CAP OPEN)

Open the cap.


The service cleaning uses while new six maintenance liquid cartridges (for sixcolors) for one sequence. The head wash uses whole new six cleaning liquidcartridges (for six colors) for one sequence. Also, exclusive dummy cartridgesare required for ink extracting during service guidance.

Opening or closing the rear cover or levers should be avoided while service clean or head wash is in progress, or the operation may have to be restartedfrom the beginning, resulting in the waste of maintenance or cleaning fluid. Ifservice clean or head wash is to be restarted, new maintenance or cleaning fluidcartridges are required.

Both the service cleaning and the head wash take approximately one our. The cartridge setting and removing guidance are displayed during service cleaning and head washing. Follow the guidance.

Empty the waste ink bottle.

NOTE

# AUTO CLEANING

> OFF

# INK CHARGE MODE

> NOT YET

# CLEANING

> NORMAL

# CAP OPEN

>


3-25

(8) Cap close (CAP CLOSE)

Closes the cap.


# CAP CLOSE

>

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-26

■ Service Menu guidance

1) Service clean (SERVICE CLEAN) Display Remarks

1 #SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN

Initial guidance The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key.


Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key.

3 #SERVICE *CHECK WASTE OK?

Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key.＊注１）

4 OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE

Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover.

5 SET DUMMY CART CLOSE L INKCOVER

Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 6's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 5-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 5-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted.

5-1 OPEN L INK COVER SET XX SLOT

Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover.

5-2 SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT


6 OPEN R INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE

Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 7's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge.

7 SET DUMMY CART CLOSE R INKCOVER

Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 8's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 7-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 7-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted.

7-1 OPEN R INK COVER SET XX SLOT

Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover.



8 EXTRACT START *CHECK WASTE OK?

Start of the ink extraction. The display changes to No. 9's by pressing the ENTER key.

9 EXTRACTING xxx

Under ink extraction. The display changes to No. 10's after completion of the sequence.

10 OPEN L INKCOVER SET CL FLUID

Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover.

11 SET CL FLUID CLOSE L INKCOVER

Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 12's by closing the left cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 11-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed.The display changes to No. 11-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 11-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted.

11-1 SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT

Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover.

11-2 OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT

Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover.

11-3 SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT



3-27

Display Remarks

12 OPEN R INKCOVER SET CL FLUID

Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 13's by opening the right cover.

13 SET CL FLUID CLOSE R INKCOVER

Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 14's by closing the right cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 13-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 13-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 13-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted.


Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover.

13-2 OPEN R INKCOVER SET XX SLOT

Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover.



14 CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK?

Start of CL cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 15's by pressing the ENTER key.

15 CHARGING xxx

Under charging CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 15's after completion of the sequence.



17

SET DUMMY CART CLOSE L INKCOVER








19

SET DUMMY CART CLOSE R INKCOVER

Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 20's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changers to No. 19-1’s when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 19-2’s when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted.






Start of the ink extracting. The display changes to No. 21's by pressing the ENTER key.

21 EXTRACTING xxx

Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 22's after completion of the sequence




Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 24's by closing the left cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 23-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 23-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 23-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-28

Display Remarks







24 OPEN R INKCOVER SET MA FLUID

Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover.

25 SET MA FLUID CLOSE R INKCOVER

Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 26's by closing the right cover after mounting WH cleaner (maintenance fluid). The display changes to No. 25-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 25-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 25-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted

25-1 SET NEW MA FLUID SET XX SLOT

Mount a new WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover.



25-3 SET MA FLUID SET XX SLOT

Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover


Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 27's by pressing the ENTER key.

27 CHARGING

xxx Under charging WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 28's after completion of the sequence.

28 EXECUTING Under filling cap The display changes to No. 29's after completion of the sequence.


End of the service cleaning. *NOTE 1) When the ENTER key is pressed at the error skip mode, the printer verifies waste ink amount. When the waste ink amount is other than 0 cc, the following guidance will be displayed.

A1 CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE

Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed.

A2 SET EMPTY BOTTLE Mount an empty waste ink bottle.

The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted.

A3 #WASTE CNT RESET *NO

Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."


3-29

2) Head wash (HEAD WASH) Display Remarks


Initial guidance The display changes to No. 2's by pressing the ENTER key.

2 #SERVICE *HEAD WASH



Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key.* Note 1)



















9 EXTRACTING xxx





Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 12's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 11-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 11-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 11-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.








Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 13's by opening the right cover.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-30

Display Remarks


Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 14's by closing the right cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) . The display changes to No. 13-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 13-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 13-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.


Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover.






Start of CL cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 15's by pressing the ENTER key.

15 CHARGING xxx

Under charging CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 15's after completion of the sequence.


















Start of the ink extracting. The display changes to No. 21's by pressing the ENTER key.

21 EXTRACTING xxx

Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 22's after completion of the sequence




Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 24's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 23-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 23-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 23-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.


3-31

Display Remarks








Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance The display changes to No. 25 by opening the right cover.

25 CLOSE R INK COVER.

Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance The display changes to No. 26’s by closing the right cover after setting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid), or to No. 25-2’s if the remaining amount of fluid is less than the expected value (250 cc), or to 25-3’s if mounting is wrong.

25-1 SET NEW CL FLUID IN XX SLOT.

Set new cleaning fluid. The display changes to No. 25’s by opening the right cover.

25-2 OPEN R INK COVER. SET XX SLOT

Set a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25’s by opening the right cover.

25-3 SET CL FLUID TO XX SLOT.

Set a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25’s by opening the right cover.


Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 27's by pressing the ENTER key.

27 CHARGING xxx

Under charging WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 28's after completion of the sequence.

28 FLUSHING xxx

Under head & sub-tank flushing. The display changes to No. 29's after completion of the sequence


Start of the CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 30's by opening the left cover.


CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 31's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 30-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 30-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted.






CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 32's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge.


CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 33's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 32-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 32-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted.






Start of the CL cleaner extracting. The display changes to No. 34's by pressing the ENTER key.

34 EXTRACTING xxx

Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 35's after completion of the sequence.


Start of the Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No.36's by opning the left cover.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-32

Display Remarks

36 SET CL FLUID OPEN L INKCOVER

Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 37's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 36-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 36-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 36-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.

36-1 SET USED FLUID SET XX SLOT







Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 38's by opening the right cover.


Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 38's by closing the right cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 38-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 38-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 38-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.

38-1 SET USED FLUID SET XX SLOT






39 SUBTANK EXTRACT *CHECK WASTE OK?

Start of the Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No.40's by pressing the ENTER key.

40 EXTRACTING

xxx Under sub-tank extracting. The display changes to No. 41's after completion of the sequence.


End of the head wash. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the

printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is not 0 cc, displays the following guidance.

A1 CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed.

A2 SET EMPTY BOTTLE Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted.




3-33

3) Ink charge (User Mode) Display Remarks

1 #SERVICE >SER VICE CLEAN


2 #SERVICE *INK CHARGE

Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. l's by pressing CANCEL key.


Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. l's by pressing CANCEL key.


Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. The display changes to No.4-1's when the expected remains (250 cc) are not exist. The display changes to No. 4-1's when wrong cartridge (dummy cartridge) is mounted. the display changes to the normal ink replacement guide when the cartridge.

4-1 SET NEW INK SET XX SLOT

Mount a new ink cartridge. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guidance by opening the cover.

5 CHARGING xxx

Under ink changing. The display changes to No.6's completion of the requence.


End of the ink change. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the

printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is over 4,000 cc, displays the following guidance:

A1 CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE

Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed.

A2 SET EMPTY BOTTLE

Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted.



SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-34

4) Ink charge (Maintenance mode) Display Remarks

1 #INK CHARGE >ALL


2 #INK CHARGE *ALL


3 #INK CHARGE *CHECK WASTE OK?

Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. The display changes to No.3-1's when the expected remains (250 cc) are not exist. The display changes to No. 3-1's when wrong cartridge (dummy cartridge) is mounted. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guide when the cartridge.

3-1 SET NEW INK SET XX SLOT

Mount a new ink cartridge. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guidance by opening the cover.


Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by pressing ENTER key.

5 CHARGING xxx

Under ink changing. The display changes to No.6's completion of the requence.

6 #INK CHARGE >ALL

End of the ink change. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the







3-35

5) Ink extracting (Maintenance mode) Display Remarks

1 #INK EXTRACT >ALL


2 #INK EXTRACT *ALL


3 #INK EXTRACT *CHECK WASTE OK?

Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key.＊注 1）

The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key.



















9 EXTRACTING xxx


10 INK EXTRACT END POWER OFF

Power off guidance display. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the






SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-36

3.4.4 RESET Menu

Resets the printer.

When the key is pressed, the reset function is executed.

An initialization message is displayed on the LCD.

▲MEC. ADJ H. M NTE▼ H. ADJ. RESET

INITIALIZING

WAIT A MOMENT


3-37

3.4.5 TEST-PRN. Menu

Prints test patterns.

Press the key to set parameters.

(1) Pattern 0 (PATTERN 0)

Prints a test pattern 0 (vertical lines).

<Sub-menus> - # EXECUTE : Prints a test pattern. - # DIRECTION : Selects either one-way or two-way printing. - # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm : Sets whether to print each of the colors. - # MODE : Selects a print mode. - # LENGTH : Specifys a line length. - # COUNT : Specifys a number of prints.

<Parameter> - EXECUTE (Execution) : None - DIR (Choice input) [Initial value: BI] - UNI : Uni-directional printing - BI : Bi-directional printing - Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) [Initial value: Bk: ON, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm OFF] - ON : Prints the specified color. - OFF : Do not print the specified color. - MODE (Choice input) [Initial value: 070410] - 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070811: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option (high density) - 030410: 360 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 030210: 360 dpi, 2-pass, speed-1, None-option - LENGTH (Value input) [Initial value: 400 mm (A3)] 1 to 99999 mm (Print length (mm) specification, Decimal 5-digit input) - COUNT (Value input) [Initial value: 1] 1 to 99 (Print number specification)

▲TEST-PRN FEED▼

SYSTEM TEST

# PATTERN0

# EXECUTE * OK?

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-38

(2) Pattern 1 (TEST PATTERN 1)

Prints a test pattern 1 (horizontal lines).

<Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.


Prints a test pattern 2 (checker).



Prints a test pattern 3 (1-dot grid).






Prints a test pattern 4 (solid pattern).



Prints a test pattern 6 (1-dot checker).









Print a test pattern 9 (gradationed pattern).

<Sub-menus and parameters> - # EXECUTE (Execution): None parameter - # DIR (Choice input) [Initial value: BI] - BI : Bi-directional printing - UNI : Uni-directional printing


3-39

- # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) [Initial value: Bk ON, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm OFF] - ON : Prints the specified color. - OFF : Do not print the specified color. Printing only in one color is possible. When two or more colors are turned ON, a setup becomes effective by the prirority of Lm (priority : high), Lc, Y, M, C, and Bk (priority : low). - # MODE (Choice input) [Initial value: 070410] - 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070811: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option (high density) - 030410: 360 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 030210: 360 dpi, 2-pass, speed-1, None-option - # LENGTH (Value input) Irrespective of an input value, the printer prints by 7600 lines. - # COUNT (Value input) [Initial value: 1] Irrespective of an input value, the printer prints by one sheet.


Prints a test pattern 10 (dot grid and diagonal line).


(12) Pattern 11 (TEST PATTERN11)

Prints a test pattern 11 (for paper feed accuracy measurement).

<Sub-menus and parameter> - # EXECUTE (Execution) : None parameter - # DIR (Choice entry) [Initial value : TWO WAY] Print a test pattern in one way regardless of choice. - # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) Print a test pattern in Bk color regardless of choice. - # MODE (Choice entry) 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, no option 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, no option 070811: End without printing 030410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, no option 030210: End without printing - # LENGTH (Value input) Print a test pattern in 100 mm top margin +359 mm pattern regardless of

input value. - # COUNT (Value input) [Initial value : 1] 1 to 99 (Number of copies specification)

(13) Pattern 12 (4 DOT GRID)



SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-40

3.4.6 SYSTEM Menu

Sets or displays system parameters.

Press the key to set system parameters.

(1) LCD language display (LANGUAGE)

Sets LCD message display language (Japanese or English).

<Parameter (Choice entry)> - JAPANESE : Japanese - ENGLISH : English

(2) Date setting (SYSTEM DATE)

Sets date (year/month/day).

<Parameter (Value input)> xx/yy/zz xx: year (lower two digits), yy: month, zz: day

(3) Time setting (SYSTEM TIME)

Sets time (hour/min/second).

<Parameter (Value input)> xx: yy xx: hour yy: minite

(4) Machine serial number setting (SERIAL NO.)

Sets a machine serial number.

<Parameter (Value input)> xxxxxxxx: 8 digits (0 to 9, A to Z: alphabets and figures)

(5) NVRAM initialization (NVRAM INIT)

Initializes the NVRAM.


▲TEST-PRN FEED▼

SYSTEM

# LANGUAGE

> ENGLISH

# SYSTEM DATE

> 00/01/01

# SYSTEM TIME

> 00:00

# SERIAL No.

> 00000000

# NVRAN INIT

>


3-41

(6) Factory setting value save (SAVE SETTING)

Saves NVRAM contents in the factory setting area in the flash memory.


(7) Factory setting value restore (RESTORE SETTING)

Restores the contents in the factory setting area in the flash memory to the NVRAM.


(8) NVRAM save (SAVE NVRAM)

Saves NVRAM contents in the NVRAM backup area in the flash memory.


(9) NVRAM restore (RESTORE NVRAM)

Restores the contents of the backup area in the flash memory to the NVRAM.


(10) BOOT Version display (BOOT VERSION)

Displays the BOOT ROM Version.


(11) Engine F/W version display (F/W VERSION)

Displays the Engine F/W version.


# SAVE SETTING

>

# RESTORE SETTING

>

# SAVE NVRAM

>

# RESTORE NVRAM

>

# BOOT VERSION

* X. XX

# F/W VERSION

* X. XX YY

X: Version number

X: System version Y: Control code

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-42

(12) IPB board version display (IPB VERSION)

Displays the IPB board version.


(13) SCSI board version display (WIM VERSION)

Displays the WIM board version.


(14) ICB board version display (ICB VERSION)

Displays the ICB board version.


(15) ASIC version display (ASIC VERSION)

Displays the ASIC version.


(16) Heater hardware version display (HEAT HW VERSION)

Displays the heater hardware version.


Note: When the heater cannot be recognized, " _ _ . _ " will be displayed.

# IPB VERSION

* X. X

# WIM VERSION

* X. X

# ICB VERSION

* X. XX

# ASIC VERSION

* X. XX

X: Version number

X: Version number

X: Version number

X: Version number

# HEAT HW VERSION

* XX. X

X: Version number


3-43

(17) Heater firmware version display (HEAT FW VERSION)

Displays the heater hardware version.


Note: When the heater cannot be recognized, " _ _ . _ " will be displayed.

(18) Heater FW update

Updates the version of the heater F/W.


An IC card containing the latest heater F/W image is used for updating the heater F/W.

The guidance in the next page explains the procedure of update.

# HEAT FW VERSION

* XX. X

# HEATER F/W UPDATE >

X: Version number

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-44

UPDATE COMPLETED. TURN OFF AND ON POWER.

UPDATING * WAIT FOR A WHILE.

INSERT IC CARD

# HEATER F/W UPDATE >OK?

# HEATER F/W UPDATE >

<Update procedure>

After inserting the IC card:

*: Flashes while update is in progress. Note: The procedure may not be completed if

power failure occurs during update operation.

(For normal end)


3-45

Note 1: When the printer does not terminate normally after restart is attempted several times, failure of the heater control panel can be considered. In this case, the heater control panel needs to be replaced.

Note 2: The heater control panel needs to be replaced.

RECOGNITION ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.

(Recognition error)

The printer will restore by turning the power off and then on (note 1).

• The printer does not recognize the heater control panel.

IC CARD ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.

(IC card error)


• The IC card is not mounted properly. • F/W image is not written in the IC card.

COMMUNICATION ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.

(Data transmission error)


• Data transfer between the IPB and heater controlpanel is not successful.

• Checksum for transferred data does not match.

WRITE ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.

(Write error)

This update procedure cannot be used because the heater F/W data has been deleted (note 2).

• FW cannot be written successfully.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-46

3.4.7 FEED Menu

Feeds paper manually.

While the key is held down, paper is fed.

A feeding message appears on the LCD.

When the key is released, the paper stops and the top menu reappears.

▲TEST-PRN FEED▼

SYSTEM


3-47

3.4.8 MONITOR Menu

Displays the states of sensors and thermistors in real time.

When the key is pressed, the monitor menu can be selected.

(1) Engine sensor (ENGINE SENSOR)

Displays the states of sensors in real time. If the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.

<Sub-menus> - # EDGE : Displays the state of the edge sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) - # FEED : Displays the state of the paper sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) - # EXIT : Displays the state of the paper delivery sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) - # HOME POSITION : Displays the state of the home position sensor. (0 : Home position is not detected, 1 : Home position

is detected) - # WIPE : Displays the state of the wipe sensor. - # LEVER : Displays the state of the lever sensor. (0 : close, 1 :

open) - # INTERLOCK-L : Displays the state of the interlock L. (0 : close, 1 :

open) - # INTERLOCK-R : Displays the state of the interlock R. (0 : close, 1 :

open) - # MEDIA END : Displays the state of the media end ensor.

<Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all menus]

(2) Ink sensor (INK SENSOR)

Displays the states of ink sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.

<Sub-menus> - # INK 1 ON : Displays the state of ink (Bk) installation sensor 1. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK 2 ON : Displays the state of ink (Lc) installation sensor 2. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK 3 ON : Displays the state of ink (Lm) installation sensor 3. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK 4 ON : Displays the state of ink (C) installation sensor 4. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK 5 ON : Displays the state of ink (M) installation sensor 5. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK 6 ON : Displays the state of ink (Y) installation sensor 6. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) - # INK COVER L : Displays the state of left ink cover sensor. (0 : close, 1 : open) - # INK COVER R : Displays the state of right ink cover sensor.

▲MONITOR SETUP▼

DIAG ACTUATOR

# ENGINE SENSOR

# EDGE * 0

# INK SENSOR

# INK1 ON

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-48

(0 : close, 1 : open)


(Remark) Alignment of sensors 1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C.

(3) Sub tank sensor (SUB TANK SENSOR)

Displays the states of sub tank sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.

<Sub-menus> - # FULL 1 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 1. - # FULL 2 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 2. - # FULL 3 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 3. - # FULL 4 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 4. - # FULL 5 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 5. - # FULL 6 : Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 6. - # HALF 1 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 1. - # HALF 2 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 2. - # HALF 3 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 3. - # HALF 4 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 4. - # HALF 5 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 5. - # HALF 6 : Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 6. - # INK SUPPLY 1 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 1. - # INK SUPPLY 2 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 2. - # INK SUPPLY 3 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 3. - # INK SUPPLY 4 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 4. - # INK SUPPLY 5 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 5. - # INK SUPPLY 6 : Displays the state of ink supply sensor 6.

<Parameter (Execution)>

None [Common to all]

(Remark) Alignment of sensors 1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C.

(4) Waste ink bottle (WASTE BOTTLE)

Displays the states of waste ink bottle sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.

<Sub-menus> - # INSTALL : Displays the state of the waste ink bottle installation sensor. (0 : mounted, 1 : Not mounted)


# SUB TANK SENSOR

# FULL1 * 0

# WASTE BOTTLE

# INSTALL * 0


3-49

(5) Winder (WINDER/UNIT)

Displays the states of winder sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.

<Sub-menus> - # SLACK : Displays the state of the slack sensor (0: slack exists, 1:

No slack) - # SWITCH1 : Displays the state of switch1. - # SWITCH2 : Displays the state of switch2.


NOTE: SWITCH 1 AND SWITCH 2 state show the winder setting switch state set to external winding, internal winding, or stop. (Not two sensors)

(6) Thermistors (THERMISTOR)

Display the states of thermistors in real time.

<Sub-menus> - # ENV. : Environmental temperature - # HEAD1 : Displays the state of the head 1 (Bk) temperature. - # HEAD2 : Displays the state of the head 2 (Lm) temperature. - # HEAD3 : Displays the state of the head 3 (Lc) temperature. - # HEAD4 : Displays the state of the head 4 (Y) temperature. - # HEAD5 : Displays the state of the head 5 (M) temperature. - # HEAD6 : Displays the state of the head 6 (C) temperaature. - # CRG1 : Displays the state of the carridge board position1 temperature. - # CRG2 : Displays the state of the carridge board position2 temperature. - # CRG3 : Displays the state of the carridge board position3 temperature. - # CRG4 : Displays the state of the carridge board position4 temperature. - # CRG5 : Displays the state of the carridge board position5 temperature. - # CRG6 : Displays the state of the carridge board position6 temperature. - # CRG7 : Displays the state of the carridge board position7 temperature. * The number of temperatures to measure on the carriage board may be changed.


NOTE: Alignment of HEAD1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C. CRG1 to 7 are mounted on the ICB board and located as follows:

CRG 1: TH 2, CRG 2: TH 6, CRG 3: TH 3, CRG 4: TH 7, CRG 5: TH 4, CRG 6: TH 8, CRG 7: TH 5

# WINDER UNIT

# SLACK *

# THERMISTOR

# ENV *

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-50

3.4.9 DIAG Menu

Makes a diagnosis of the engine and SCSI boards.

When the key is pressed, the Diagnosis Menu can be selected.

After making a diagnosis on the Diagnosis Menu, execute the reset function.

(1) Flash ROM (FLASH ROM)

Makes a diagnosis of the flash ROM and display its results.


(2) PIO (PIO)

Makes a diagnosis of the flash ROM and display its results.


(3) NVRAM (NVRAM)

Makes a diagnosis of the NVRAM and display its results.


(4) Carriage I/F (CARRIAGE I/F)

Makes a diagnosis of the carriage interface and display its results.


(5) Ink EEPROM (INK EEPROM)

Makes a diagnosis of the ink EEPROM and display its results.


▲MONITOR SETUP▼

DIAG ACTUATOR

# FLASH ROM

>

# PIO

>

# NVRAM

>

# CARRIAGE I/F

>

# INK EEPROM

>


3-51

(6) SCSI data (SCSI DATA)

Makes a diagnosis of the SCSI board and display its results.


(7) ATG（ATG）

Makes a diagnosis of the ATG and display its results.


(8) DRAM (DRAM)

Makes a diagnosis of the band memory and display its results.


(9) RSM (RSM)

Makes a diagnosis of the RSM and display its results.


(10) PTC (PTC)

Makes a diagnosis of the PTC and display its results.


(11) PDD (PDD)

Makes a diagnosis of the PDD and display its results.


(12) All (ALL)

Makes the above diagnosis 1 to 11 continuously and display their results.


# SCSI DATA

>

# ATG

>

# DRAM

>

# RSM

>

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-52

(13) VDD (VDD)

Sets 24 V, 17 V, or 6 V for VDD. Measure voltage by a tester.

<Sub-menu> - 24 V : Sets 24 V. - 17V : Sets 17V. - 6V : Sets 6V.

<Parameter (Execution)> None Measuring points and expected values (ICB1 board)

Operation panel specific voltage

24V 7V 6V Measuring

point Expected voltage [v]

Usage

TP22 24 17 6 K-Left-On voltage TP25 12 8.5 3 K-Left-Off voltage

TP28 24 17 6 K-Right-On voltage

TP30 12 8.5 3 K-Right-Off voltage

TP32 24 17 6 Lm-Left-On voltage TP24 12 8.5 3 Lm-Left-Off voltage

TP36 24 17 6 Lm-Righ-On voltage

TP38 12 8.5 3 Lm-Righ-Off voltage

TP40 24 17 6 Lc-Left-On voltage TP42 12 8.5 3 Lc-Left-Off voltage

TP44 24 17 6 Lc-Right-On voltage

TP46 12 8.5 3 Lc-Right-Off voltage

TP48 24 17 6 V-Left-On voltage TP50 12 8.5 3 V-Left-Off voltage

TP52 24 17 6 V-Right-On voltage

TP54 12 8.5 3 V-Right-Off voltage

TP56 24 17 6 M-Left-On voltage TP58 12 8.5 3 M-Left-Off voltage

TP60 24 17 6 M-Right-On voltage

TP62 12 8.5 3 M-Right-Off voltage

TP64 24 17 6 C-Left-On voltage TP66 12 8.5 3 C-Left-Off voltage

TP68 24 17 6 C-Right-On voltage

TP70 12 8.5 3 C-Right-Off voltage


3-53

(14) Operation panel (PANEL)

Operates the LCD, LEDs, buzzer, and keys on the operation panel. The results are judged audibly.

<Parameter (Choice entry & Execution)> None KEY : Displays the key entry on the LCD. DISPLAY : Turns on and off LEDs in sequence, displays specific character

strings, and sounds buzzers.

# PANEL

> KEY

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-54

3.4.10 SETUP Menu

Sets on/off of the power same mode.

Press the key to set parameters.

(1) Power save (POWER SAVE)

Sets whether to save power.

<Parameters (choice input)> - ON : Saves power. - OFF : Do not save power.

(2) SCSI driver (SCSI DRIVER)

Sets whether the SCSI driver works for IP-4500 or IP-6600.

<Parameters (choice input)> - NORMAL : Works for IP-6600 driver. - COMPATIBLE : Works for IP-4500 driver.

▲MONITOR SETUP▼

DIAG ACTUATOR

# POWER SAVE

> ON

# SCSI DRIVER

> NORMAL


3-55

3.4.11 ACTUATOR Menu

Operates each actuator individually.

When the key is pressed, parameters can be set.

(1) Carriage movement (MOVE CARRIAGE)

Move the carriage. (The acceleration and speed are fixed.)

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - HOME : Detects home position and move the carriage to the home position. - CAP : Moves the carriage to the capping position.

(Capping is not performed.) - CENTER : Moves the carriage to the center. - WIPE : Moves the carriage to the wiping position.

(2) Paper feed motor (PF MOTOR)

Drives the paper feed motor. (The acceleration and speed are fixed.)

<Parameters (Choice input)> - OFF : Stops the motor. - FORWARD : Runs the motor in the paper feeding direction. - REWIND : Runs the motor in the rewinding direction.

(3) Pump motor (PUMP MOTOR)

Controls the pump motor.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor. - NORMAL : Runs the motor in the normal direction. - REVERSE : Runs the motor in the reverse direction.

(4) Wipe motor (WIPE MOTOR)

Controls the wipe motor.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor. - NORMAL : Runs the motor in the normal direction. - REVERSE : Runs the motor in the reverse direction.

▲MONITOR SETUP▼

DIAG ACTUATOR

# MOVE CARRIAGE

> HOME

# PF MOTOR

> OFF

# PUMP MOTOR

> STOP

# WIPE MOTOR

> STOP

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-56

(5) Pump solenoid 1 (PUMP SOLENOID 1) (Wipe side)

Controls pump solenoid 1.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - OFF : Turns fan motor 1 OFF. - ON : Turns fan motor 1 ON.

(6) Pump solenoid 2 (PUMP SOLENOID 2) (Cap side)

Controls pump solenoid 2.


(7) Fan motor 1 (FAN MOTOR1) (Wipe side)

Controls fan motor 1.


(8) Fan motor 2 (FAN MOTOR2) (Senter)

Control fan motor 2.


(9) Fan motor 3 (FAN MOTOR3) (Cap side)

Control fan motor 3.


# PUMP SOLENOID1

> OFF

# PUMP SOLENOID2

> OFF

# FAN MOTOR1

> OFF

# FAN MOTOR2

> OFF

# FAN MOTOR3

> OFF


3-57

(10) Unit Cooling FAN (COOL FAN)

Control the unit cooling fan.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - OFF : Turns the unit cooling fan OFF. - ON : Turns the unit cooling fan ON.

(11) Head Cooling FAN (HEAD COOL FAN)

Control the head cooling fan.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - OFF : Turns the head cooling fan OFF. - ON : Turns the head cooling fan ON.

(12) Winding motor (WIND MOTOR)

Drive the winding motor.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> *Note: The parameters may be changed to “normal” and “reverse” rotation.

- OFF : Stops the motor. - ON : Drives the motor.

(13) Ink supply motor 1 (ISM 1) (Bk)

Drives ink supply motor 1.

<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor in normal directuion. - NORMAL : Drives the motor. - REVERSE : Drives the motor in reverse direction.

(14) Ink supply motor 2 (ISM 2) (Lm)



# COOL FAN

> OFF

# HEAD COOL FAN

> OFF

# WIND MOTOR

> OFF

# ISM1

> STOP

# ISM2

> STOP

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-58

(15) Ink supply motor 3 (ISM 3) (Lc)



(16) Ink supply motor 4 (ISM 4) (Y)



(17) Ink supply motor 5 (ISM 5) (M)



(18) Ink supply motor 6 (ISM 6) (C)



# ISM3

> STOP

# ISM4

> STOP

# ISM5

> STOP

# ISM6

> STOP


3-59

3.4.12 FUNCTION Menu

Executes the functions provided for the printer.

When the key is pressed, the parameters can be set.

(1) System information print (SYSTEM PRINT)

Prints information about the system, setting, mechanical parameters, and ink.


For more information on system information print, see Section 3.4.12.1.

(2) Error log print (ERROR LOG PRINT)

Print error log information stored in the printer.


For more information on error log information printing, see Section 3.4.12.2.

(3) History print (HISTORY PRINT)

Prints ink system cleaning condition stored to the printer.


For more information on history print, see Section 3.4.12.3.

▲FUNC ▼ COUNTER

# SYSTEM PRINT

>

# ERROR LOG PRINT

>

# HISTORY PRINT

>

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-60

3.4.12.1 System information print

The system information print prints system information such a version, cartridge information such ink remaining amount,media information, media feed adjustment values, mechanical parameters, registered media information,and etc.

<Print format>

3.4.12.2 Error log print

An engine error log is created when Fatal/Correctable1/Correctable2 error or warning occurs or is released and when the printer is shut down. A total of 9000 bytes of error log information is generated (300 logs , 30 bytes per log).

Error logs can be printed by selecting the ERROR LOG menu of the FUNCTION menu.

<Print format>


3-61

<Print contents> 1. No: Error log number 300 logs are printed from the latest one. 2. Date: Error logged date Print an error logged date. 3. Time: Error logged time Print an error logged time in 24 hour system. (hour: minute) 4. Err: Error type (Print in symbols) 1 --- Correctable 1 error 2 --- Correctable 2 error F --- Fatal error 5. Fatal: Fatal error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a fatal error type.

Bit pos Flag name Description

21-23 Fired to "0"

22 Long term storage 0: Normal 1: Error

21 Cooling fan 0: Normal 1: Error

20 Cap position gap 0: Normal 1: Error

19 Reserve Not defined.

18 FFC connection 0: Normal 1: Error

17 Sub-tank supply 0: Normal 1: Error

16 Ink supply sensor 0: Normal 1: Error

15 Sub-tank sensor 0: Normal 1: Error

14 Edge sensor sensitivit 0: Normal 1: Error

13 NVRAM 0: Normal 1: Error

12 VDD2 0: Normal 1: Error

11 Servo 0: Normal 1: Error

10 Capping 0: Normal 1: Error

9 Temperature sensor 0: Normal 1: Error

8 IC temperature 0: Normal 1: Error

7 Head temperature 0: Normal 1: Error

6 Wiper 0: Normal 1: Error

5 Home position detection 0: Normal 1: Error

4 Flash 0: Normal 1: Error

3 Reserve Fired to "0"

2 Fan 0: Normal 1: Error

1 GA_DMA 0: Normal 1: Error

0 Diagnostic 0: Normal 1: Error

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-62

6. Cor1: Correctable 1 error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a correctable 1 error type.


15-9 - 0: Fixed

8 Media jam 1 0: Normal 1: Media jam (servo detection)

7 SCSI communication error 0: Normal 1: Communication error 1

6 Media size 0: Normal 1: Media size error

5 Skew 0: Normal 1: Skew error

4 - 0: Fixed

3 Out of media 0: Normal 1: Out of media

2 Media jam 2 0: Normal 1: Paper jam

1 Lever 0=Close, 1=Open

0 Interlock 0=Close, 1=Open

7. Cor2: Correctable 2 error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a correctable 2 error type.


15-9 - 0: Fixed

8 Waste bottle installation 0: Normal 1: Not installed

7 - 0: Fixed

6 Environmental temperature 0: Normal 1: Error

5 Head temperature 0: In operating range 1: Outside operating range

4 Cartridge installation 0: Normal 1: Cartridge not installed

3 Cartridge ID 0: Normal 1: Cartridge ID error

2 Ink remaining amount 0: Ink 1: No ink

1 Ink cover 2 0=Close, 1=Open

0 Ink cover 1 0=Close, 1=Open

8. Warn: Warning type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a warning type.


15-3 - 0: Fixed

2 Winding unit 0: Normal 1: Error

1 - 0: Fixed

0 Near Empty 0: Ink 1: Ink running out


3-63

9. Status: Engine status type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates an engine status type.


31 Power off 1: Shut down

30-26 Reserve 0: Fixed

25 Ink error 0=No error, 1=Error

24 Existence of the cartridge 0=Existence, 1=No cartridg

23 Reserve 0: Fixed

22 Under pre-heating 1=Under pre-heating

21 Under firmware updating 1=Under updating

20 Under ink supplying 1=Under ink supplying

19 Cartridge end 1=Enpty ink in the cartridge

18 Ink cover R 0=Close, 1=Open

17 Ink cover L 0=Close, 1=Open

16 Winding nit 0: Stop 1: Operating

15 Data reception 1: Data is being received

14 Outlet sensor 0: Off 1: On

13 Media supply sensor 0: Off 1: On

12 Ink Fill 1: Ink is being filled.

11 ShutDown 1: Shutdown is being requested.

10 Dry 1: Drying

9 Panel 0: The engine controls the panel. 1: The controller controls the panel.

8 Recover 1: Recovering

7 Paper Loading 1: Paper loading

6 Clean 1: Cleaning

5 Print 1: Printing

4 Power Save 1: Power save mode

3 Pause 1: Pausing

2 Busy 1: Busy

1 Error 0: No error 1: Error

0 Warning 0: No warning 1: Warning

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-64

10. Distance: Running distance (Print in decimal digits) Engine running distance (unit: mm) 11. Pa: Paper type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a type of paper. 64h: Registered media 1 (PAPER) 65h: Registered media 2 (Glossy) 66h: Registered media 3 (Matte) 67h: Registered media 4 (Banner) 68h: Registered media 5 (BLT_B) 69h: Registered media 6 ... 77h: Registered media 20 12. C/R: Roll paper/cut sheet type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates roll paper or cut sheet. 00h: Roll paper 01h: Cut sheet

3.4.12.3 Cleaning history print

The cleaning history print prints daily maintenance history information that the customer performed.

Up to 100 logs that in clude data and performance contents information can be obtained.

The cleaning history print can be printed by performing HISTORY PRINT in FINC menu.

<Print format>

Contents list UM_SERVICE Service cleaning UM_HEADWASH Head wash UM_INKCHARGE I nk initial charge UM_CAPCLEAN Cap cleaning UM_WIPECLEAN Wiper cleaning UM_FILLCAP Fill cap UM_ADJHEIGHT Head height adjustment UM_NORMALCLN Normal cleaning UM_SLIGHTCLN Slight cleaning UM_STRONGCLN Strong cleaning UM_INVALID No history (unsettled)


3-65

3.4.13 COUNTER Menu

Display and set the paper movement length and paper use length counter (counter 1) saved in the engine.

When the key key is pressed, parameters can be adjusted.

(1) Paper use length (A3) (PAPER COUNT A3)

Displays and sets the paper use length (A3 size) of counter 1.

<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m)


Displays and sets the paper use length (A2 size) of counter 1.



Displays and sets the paper use length (A1 to A0 size) of counter 1.



Displays and sets the paper use length (A0 size to 36" size) of counter 1.


(5) Paper use length (36") (PAPER COUNT 36")

Displays and sets the paper use length (larger than 36" size) of counter 1.


▲FUNC ▼ COUNTER

# PAPER COUNTA3

> 000000m

# PAPER COUNTA2

> 000000m

# PAPER COUNTA1

> 000000m

# PAPER COUNTA0

> 000000m

# PAPER COUNT36"

> 000000m

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-66

3.5 System Information Management

The system information managed by the engine includes mechanical correction parameters, running distance counter, and ink cartridge data, which are stored in the NVRAM. The system information is stored in the SRAM or flash memory as required for operation or backup.

- SRAM area : Stores current values of system information. - NVRAM area : Stores power-on default values of system information. - Flash memory area : Stores following information: • NVRAM structure information and initial values • Factory-set NVRAM information • NVRAM backup information

<SRAM> <NVRAM> <Flash memory>

NVRAM current value

Default valueNVRAM backup

information (8 KB)

⑦

⑥

①

⑤

④

③

②

NVRAM factory settings (8 KB)

Program and data

NVRAM structure information and initial

values


3-67

Pass ①：NVRAM initialization (Flash -> NVRAM)

<Processing>

(1) Initializes the NVRAM with the program default values. The engine correction values are returned to the values before adjustment.

<Operation procedure or start timing>

It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu:

(1) - SYSTEM menu: NVRAM INIT

Pass ②：Save factory settings to flash memory. (NVRAM -> Flash)

<Processing>

(1) Write all NVRAM data into the factory setting area of the flash memory.


It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu:

(1) - SYSTEM menu: SAVE SETTING

Pass ③：Return the NVRAM to factory settings. (Flash -> NVRAM)

<Processing>

(1) Write some NVRAM factory settings (Section NVRAM4*1) stored in the flash memory into the NVRAM.

*1: Section NVRAM4: Mechanical, head adjustment values, paper feed correction value for each paper, drying time, etc.

Do not write the counter value in NVRAM.


It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following

menu:

(1) - SYSTEM menu: RESTORE SETTING

Pass ④：Save NVRAM in the flash memory for backup. (NVRAM -> Flash)

<Processing>

(1) Write all NVRAM default values into the NVRAM backup area of the flash memory.


(1) It is performed when the power is shut down or when the printer is reset.

(2) It can be executed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu:

- SYSTEM menu: SAVE NVRAM

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-68

Pass ⑤：Restore the NVRAM with NVRAM backup information in the flash memory. (Flash -> NVRAM)

<Processing>

(1) Write all NVRAM backup information saved in the flash memory into the NVRAM.


(1) It can be executed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu:

- SAVE: RESTORE NVRAM

Pass ⑥：SRAM -> NVRAM

Pass ⑦：NVRAM -> SRAM

(1) Passes 6 and 7 are used by the engine F/W if required.


3-69

3.6 Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

3.6.1 Entering maintenance mode

Press the following six switches on the heater panel in this order.

Front --> Front --> Rear --> Rear --> Platen -->

Platen

3.6.2 Basic menu operation

(1) Transfering between items

Use the front and front keys.

(2) Selecting an item

Press the front ON/OFF key to enter the item after transfering to the item of which parameter is required to change.

(3) Selecting a parameter

Use the front and front key to select a parameter.

(4) Determining a selected value

Press the front ON/OFF key to set the selected value.

The display returns to the setting display.

(5) Exiting the mode

Transfer to EXIT menu that exists in the lowest class menu.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

3-70

3.6.3 Menu items

The setting items in the maintenance mode are listed below.

No Item Display item Setting value Meaning Initial

value

1 Front heater presetting Upper temperature limitation

F LIMIT 15～60C 15～60C

Front heater upper limitation temperature preset by users. 55

2 Rear heater presetting Upper temperature limitation

R LIMIT 15～60C 15～60C

Rear heater upper limitation temperature preset by users.

55

3 Print heater presetting Upper temperature limitation

P LIMIT 15～60C 15～60C

Print heater upper limitation temperature preset by users.

55

4 Stand by temperature STANDBY TEMP 15～40C 15～40C

Preset temperature for stand by state

35

OFF Turns the heater test off ○ 5

Heater test (NOTE 2)

HEATER TEST

ON Turns the heater test on

YES Returns all parameters to factory settings

○ 6 Parameter initializing RESET PARAM

NO Do nothing

YES Exit from the maintenance mode ○ 7 End of setting EXIT

NO Does not exit from the maintenance mode

(NOTE 1) If the unit of the heater temperature is set to "F", all values are converted to "F". (NOTE 2) The heater test ignores the heater ON/OFF command from the serial interface, and turns the heater ON/OFF

only by the ON/OFF switch operation on the operation panel.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

4-1

Section 4 Troubleshooting (General)

Before deciding that there is a serious problem with the printer check the following items.

Items to check Symptom Items to check Corrective measures

Power cable connection Plug the power cable into the outlet correctly. Power supply to the outlet Supply the power to the outlet. Isolation switch ON/OFF Turn the isolation switch ON.

Power does not turn on

Power switch ON/OFF Turn the power switch ON. The printer does not start or operate correctly

ERROR lamp and message on the LCD

Take appropriate measures according to the error message. See When an Error Message Appears on Section 5 in the User's Guide.

Interface cable connection Connect the interface cable correctly. ERROR lamp and message on the LCD

Take appropriate measures according to the error message. See When an Error Message Appears on Section 5 in the User's Guide. Cannot print

ERROR lamp OFF Print nozzle adjustment pattern. See Mechanical Adjustment Menu on Section 3 in the User's Guide.

The transmitted data is not processed immediately

DATA lamp (flashing?) Check the communication conditions to the computer.

Paper type Use Our-recommended paper. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide.

Ink type Use Our-recommended ink. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide.Poor print quality

Ink head cleaning Clean the ink head. See Head Cleaning on Section 2 in the User's Guide.

Paper type Check whether the paper type setting matches the type of the loaded paper. See Installing Paper Roll on the Printer and Removing it from the Printer on Section 2 in the User's Guide. Use Our-recommended paper. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide.

Paper setting Set the paper correctly. See Replacing the Paper Roll on Section 2 in the User's Guide.

Paper jams occur frequently

Check whether there is any foreign material in the carriage path on the paper path.

Remove any foreign material. See Clearing Paper Jams on Section 5 in the User's Guide.

Print speed is slow Environment temperature Print in 20°C or higher environment temperature.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

4-2

Measures to Be Taken When the Plotter Malfunctions Problem Possible cause Corrective measure

A no-ink message is displayed when there is enough ink.

The ink bottle is not installed correctly. Check whether the joint is inserted into the ink bottle.

Abnormal sound The motor seems to be defective. Test the actuator in maintenance mode to check operation.

Measures to Solve Print Quality Problems When a Print Error Occurs

Symptom Possible cause Corrective measure Blank data is transmitted. Check print data. The environmental conditions do not meet the printer specifications.

Increase room temperature to 15°C or higher (preferably, 23°C) and warm up the printer sufficiently.

A blank sheet of paper is output or the printed drawing is faded.

The paper is set incorrectly. Check the paper settings. Parts of a drawing are missing or the print is unclear.

Foreign objects are attached to the head.

Clean the head from the CLEANING menu.

The paper is loaded upside down. Check whether the paper is loaded correctly.

The paper is set incorrectly. Check the paper settings. The print is blurred.

The heater temperature is too low. Raise the heater temperature. The leading edge of the paper is curled.

Check whether the leading edge of the paper is curled. If it is curled, cut the leading edge.

The paper is slightly wrinkled. If it wrinkles, feed the paper and cut off the wrinkled part of the paper.

Wrinkles are caused by inappropriate setting of paper.

Set the paper correctly.

The printed surface is stained.

Stains on the platen may be transferred.

-Wipe off stains on the platen. -Wipe off stains on the head base.

Parts of a drawing are missing at start of print.

The environmental conditions do not meet the printer specifications.

Use the printer n the recommended environment. Turn ON the head warm up.

Parts of a drawing are missing even when cleaning is performed repeatedly.

Clogged nozzle. Perform fill cap operation.

Print quality is not improved even when performing the cleaning.

Stains on the cap or wiper may be trans ferred.

Wipe off stains on the cap and wiper using the cleaning liquid.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 4 Troubleshooting (General)

4-3

Measures to Be Taken When the Heater Mulfunctions Symptom Possible cause Corrective measure

The power supply (PSU-XW1x) and HCP board (heater control board) are connected through DC-CBL-5V/12V (64) incorreclly.

Connect the, correctly. LCD on the heater control panel cannnot be lightend

HCP board is malfunctioned Replace the heater control panel. Characters cannot be displayed on the heater control panel LCD.

HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel.

The AC power is not connected to the heater power inlet on the wiper sider of the back of the printer.

Connect the AC power to the heater power inlet.

The heater power breaker on the wiper side of the back of the printer is not turned ON (1).

Turn ON (1) the breaken switch.

The RLY board and HCP board are not connected through RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY.

Connect them correctly.

The RLY board is malfunctioned. Replace the RLY board.

"POWER ON HEATER POWER SWITCH" appears on the heater control panel LCD.

The HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel. The heater does not become hot even when performing the heater test.("+" is displayed. The preset temperature and the current temperature are displayed.)

The HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel.

The HCP board and the RLY board are not connected through the RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY.


The power voltage alternation switch ASSY and heaters are not connected.


The HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel. The RLY board is malfunctioned. Replace the RLY board ASSY.

The heater does not become hot even when performing the heater test.("+" is displayed. The preset temperature and the current temperature are displayed.)

The heater is malfunctioned. Replace the heater. The ENG-IF cable is not connected. Connect that correctly. The HCP board is malfunctioned. (Serial interface circuit)

Replace the heater control panel.

The IPB1 board is malfunctioned. (Serial interface circuit)

Replace the IPB1 board.

The heater does not become hot during print even through the heater becomes hot in the heater test.

The ENG-IF cable is majfunctioned. Replace the ENG-IF cable. The THRM cable ASSY is not connected. Connect that correctly. The HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel. Abnormal temperature is

displayed. The thermistor is malfunctioned. Replace the thermistor ASSY. The THRM cable is connected wrongly. Connect that correctly. The HCP board is malfunctioned. Replace the heater control panel. The heater temperature

becomes extremely high. The RLY board is malfunctioned. Replace the RLY board. The heater control panel is not connected correctly to the IPB1 board with the ENG-IF cable.

Make a correct connection.

Malfunction of the heater control panel. Replace the heater panel.

"INITIALIZING" continuously appears on the LCD of the heater control panel.

Malfunction of the IPB1 board. Replace the IPB1 board. The heater control panel is not connected correctly to the power supply unit (PSU-XW1X).

Make a correct connection.

Malfunction of the heater control panel. Replace the heater control panel. Malfunction of the power supply unit (PSU-XW1X). Replace the power supply unit.

"POWER SAVE MODE" continuously appears on the LCD of the heater control panel.

Malfunction of the IPB1 board. Replace the IPB1 board.

(Blank Page)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)

5-1

Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)

This section describes how to troubleshoot engine or SCSI controller errors.

If a print quality defect occurs, no error appears on the LCD in most cases. If the printer has other troubles, the error lamp lights and an error message appears on the LCD.

Print quality defects are judged by nozzle check patterns. If an error message appears, check the cause and location of the trouble according to the error message and take appropriate measure. If no error message is displayed, determine the cause and location and take appropriate measure.

5.1 Print Quality Defects

If a print quality defect occurs, no error message appears on the LCD in most cases. A print quality defect caused by a head cannot be detected by printing a nozzle check pattern.

The ajudgement criteria for print quality defects caused by heads during installation or operation are described below.

1) Check patterns should be in the failure mode range that can be checked with nozzle check patterns.

2) Determine whether it is caused by the electrical system or ink system. (1) All heads are faulty. --- Electrical system (2) One head is faulty.

Replace the FFC connected to the head with another head, and output a pattern. - If the symptom appears with the head --- Ink system or head - If the symptom appears with another head --- Electrical system

5-2

3) Isolation when the ink system is defective (1) If ink cannot be filled If ink is not absorbed, the possible causes are as follows:

・ The cap is stained--------------------------- Clean the cap with the cap cleaning liquid.

・ The capping position is incorrect. -------- Correct the capping position. (See 8.9)

・ Capping adsorption defect --------------- Replace the cap unit or parts. (pump ASSY, cap ASSY, olyfis, or sensor (AIR)

・ Bent ink supply tube ---------------------- Correct the tube. ・ The head nozzle is stained --------------- Charge the wipe cleaning liquid. ・ Height of the capping unit is incorrect - Correct height of the capping unit

(See 8.10). (2) If there is air remaining in the ink tube Even if there is a little air in the ink tube, it does not affect printing. However, if

thereis much air, an ejection error may occur. ・ Insufficient cap adsorption ---------------- Replace the cap unit or parts. ・ Tube air leak -------------------------------- Tighten joints. ・ Head air leak -------------------------------- Replace the head.

4) Measure to be taken if a head is defective If an ejection defect is caused by a head, take the following measure. If the

problem is not solved, replace the head. (1) Manual cleaning

・ Cleaning in user mode When this function is executed, air and dust in the head are removed and

meniscus is correctly formed. The problem is mostly solved by manual cleaning. ・ The procedure is described in 8.13.2.

(2) Fill cap

・ Perform this function in the User mode. This function charges ink into the cap, immerses the head (surface) in ink,

leaves the printer for a while to solve the nozzle choking. Use this function when print missing cannot be solved even though performing the cleaning repeatedly.

Leave the printer for one or two hours after performing this function. Instruct users to contact our service centers if the printer cannot be recovered

after leaving for 24 hours. (3) Ink drain

・ If the problem is not solved by above steps 1 and 2, there may be air inside the head and it cannot be discharged.

In this case, leave the printer as it is for a while (1 or 2 hours) or remove ink and refill refresh ink. (Use a new waste ink bottle when removing ink.)

・ See 8.12 for a detailed procedure. ・ Leave the printer more than one hour after charging ink.

(4) Cleaning with refresh ink ・ If the printer is transported or left unused for a long time, the problem may

not be solved by draining ink. In this case, it is recommended to clean the ink tube, sub-tank, air damper

filter, head filter, and nozzles using maintenance fluid cartridges. (Use a new waste ink bottle for this cleaning.)

・ See 8.13.5 for a detailed procedure.


5-3

5) If it is caused by head rubbing or paper jam ・ If paper jams or rubbing occurs frequently, the head nozzle plate may be

damaged. In this case, nozzle dots may not miss, but deflection may occur, causing a

poor print quality. ・ The head height must be checked. Use the optimum paper, set paper correctly, and use the correct

environment. If the problem cannot be fixed, replace the head itself.

6) If nozzle missing increases ・ Verify the head voltage. See and set the recommend voltage written on the

head.

7) Ink adhesion ・ If ink adhere to the carridge cable and the head cable, wipe it up

immediately. ・ If the carridge cable or the head cable is damaged, replace it.

5-4

5.2 Error Message Types

Error messages are classified according to details of troubles as follows:

（1） Operator call errors

These errors can be corrected by the operator.

（2）Warning

These errors can be corrected by the operator and include the following: ・ Communication error ・ Winder timeout

（3） Service call errors

These errors must be corrected by service personnel. ・ Power-on self-diagnostic error ・ Engine error ・ System error


5-5

5.3 Operator Call Errors

The following errors can be corrected by the operator.

<Ink cartridge>

(1) Ink cartridge

Description: There is no ink. Measure: Take appropriate measure according to the message.

Description: An ink cartridge is not installed. Measure: (1) Recovery according to guidance. Check installation to see if the cartridge is mounted properly. (2) Check loose connection of the cartridge electrode. Check the cartridge, and if the electrode gets dirty, clean it. Correct the board in the cartridge if it is mounted askew or

decentered. If this does not solve the problem, replace the cartridge (3) Check the connection of the connector of the INK2 board. (4) Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2

board, If the position of screws deviates, the contact of the electrode is displaced.

(5) Replace the IPB1 board.

Description: Ink cartridge error. Measure: Take appropriate measure according to the message.

* If this error occurs immediately after the cartridge is replaced, the cartridge just replaced should be suspected in addition to the cartridges of ink colors indicated in the guidance.

(1) Recovery according to guidance. Check installation to see if the cartridge is mounted properly. (2) Check loose connection of the cartridge electrode. Check the cartridge, and if the electrode gets dirty, clean it. Correct the board in the cartridge if it is mounted askew or

decentered. If this does not solve the problem, replace the cartridge

OPEN X INKCOVER CHANGE YY INK

X : L (Left) / R (right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm

OPEN X INKCOVER SET YY INK

X : L (Left) / R (right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm

OPEN X INKCOVER Z CHECK YY INK

X : L (Left) / R (Right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm Z : Type of error 1: Check sun error 2: Different color 3: Different type (OEM code) 4: Hash error 5: Write error 6: Upper limit error 7: Serial ID I/O error 8: Different custom serial ID 9: Ink remaining history error

5-6

(3) Check the connection of the connector of the INK2 board. (4) Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2



(2) Ink cover

Description: The ink cover open. Measure: (1) Recovery according to guidance. (2) Check mounting of the cartridge cover switch. (3) Check connection of the INK2 board. (4) Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2



(3) Ink remain（Warning）

The ink LED flashes.(No message guidance) Description: Ink is running out. (Warning) Measure: Replace the ink cartridge.

INKCOVER IS OPEN CLOSE X INKCOVER

X : L (Left) / R (right)


5-7

<Waste ink>

(1) Waste ink bottle is not mounted.

Measure: (1) Check the waste ink bottle is properly secured. (2) Check connection the switch of the waste ink bottle, mounting and

connection of the connector. (3) Replace the waste ink bottle if the switch or connector of the waste

ink bottle is broken by ink.

(2) Waste ink bottle is full.

<Paper>

(1) Paper jam

(2) Paper

Description: Paper runs out. Measure: (1) Set new paper. (2) If the error is not reset after the paper is not set, malfunction of the

feeder sensor or discharge sensor may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, Clean the sensor.

(3) If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace the sensor.

(4) Some kinds of paper are hard to be detected by the sensor, Try other type of paper.

(5) Infrared rays are used for detection, Malfunction may be caused by strong light from outside.

Description: Invalid paper size (paper edge cannot be detected). Measure: (1) Set paper with a correct size. (2) If the error continues to occur, malfunction of the edge sensor may

be the cause of error. Check installation of the sensor and

BOTTLE ISN’T SET SET BOTTLE

WASTE INK FULL CHANGE BOTTLE

LIFT LEVER & 1 OPEN REAR COVER

LIFT LEVER & 2 OPEN REAR COVER

LIFT LEVER SET PAPER


5-8

connection of the connector. Clean the sensor. (3) If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace

the sensor. (4) Some kinds of paper are hard to be detected by the sensor, Try

other type of paper.

Description: Paper skew occurred. Measure: Set paper correctly.

Check paper skew.

(3) Lever

Measure: If the message remains to appear after the lever is put down, malfunction of the lever sensor may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace the sensor.

SET PAPER PUSH DOWN LEVER



5-9

＜Rear cover＞

Measure: Check if the rear cover is not loose. If the message remains to appear after the cover is opened then closed, malfunction of the interlock switch may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, If the error continues to occur, or the switch is damaged, replace the switch.

＜Temperature＞

(1) Abnormal head temperature

Measure: Use it within the operating temperature range. Leave the printer for a while until the head temperature falls within the range.

(2) Abnormal ambient temperature

Measure: Check the ambient temperature. Check the environment thermistor. Replace the IPB1 board.

＜Winder＞

The error LED flashes (warning) if the winder time out has occurred.

If the rewind motor locks up, check that paper or scroller is caught on something and does not move. Check the slack sensors.

CLOSE REAR COVER

ENV. TEMP. ERROR CHANGE CONDITION

HEAD TEMP. ERROR WAIT A MOMENT

5-10

5.4 Warning

5.4.1 Communication errors

A communication error indicates that there is a problem in communication conditions or protocol with the SCSI connection between the printer and the computer.

Error description Error state display Parity error W SCSI ERROR 001 Bus timeout error W SCSI ERROR 002

＜Measures＞ (1) Check SCSI cable connection and terminator switch.

(2) Turn the host SCSI parity bit setting ON.

(3) Check the host SCSI driver setting.

(4) Replace WIM1 board.

5.4.2 Winder timeout

The winder slack sensor is kept ON and paper is not wound.

The error LED flashes.

＜Measures＞ (1) Remove the paper at the slack sensor.

(2) Place paper on the winding paper core correctly.

PRINT READY W SCSI ERROR nnn

nnn: Error code


5-11

5.5 Service Call Errors

The following error messages indicate the errors that must be corrected by service personnel.

HINT

Reference If a service call error message is displayed, the user should be advised to turn the power switch off and on again and check whether the error occurs again. This may eliminate the error.

5.5.1 Self-diagnostic errors at power on

An error is detected in the engine during power-on self-diagnosis (POC).

Get information of error condition; time of occurrence, frequency of error, operation right before error occurrence, and operating temperature.

An error code is displayed in hexadecimal figure. POC error codes correspond to bits as follows.

When multiple errors are occurred, the hexadecimal figure that are added with each error code is displayed.

（Example: E0850 is indicated when NVRAM error, power failure and FPGA (ICB) error occur.）

Bit Error code Diagnosis Result 0 0 0 0 1 Internal RAM 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 1 0 0 0 2 SRAM 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 2 0 0 0 4 Flash ROM 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 3 0 0 0 8 PIO 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 4 0 0 1 0 NVRAM 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 5 0 0 2 0 FPGA (IPB) 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 6 0 0 4 0 FPGA (ICB) 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 7 0 0 8 0 ASIC CONF (IPB) 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 8 0 1 0 0 ASIC CONF (ICB) 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 9 0 2 0 0 DRAM 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal

10 0 4 0 0 SCSI register 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 11 0 8 0 0 Power supply 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 12 1 0 0 0 SCSI board 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal

13,14,15 Reserved

5-12

5.5.1.1 Internal RAM (0001)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the RAM built in the CPU was diagnosed, and an error was detected.

＜Defective module＞ (1) IPB1 board.

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) The CPU may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.2 SRAM (0002)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the SRAM on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.

＜Defective module＞ (1) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) The CPU, SRAM, or BRP may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.3 Flash ROM (0004)

＜Description＞ The program area in the flash ROM is sum-checked, and it could not be read correctly, causing an error.


＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Install the program again. (2) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.4 PIO (0008)

＜Description＞ Perform a read/write test on a specific PIO and diagnose whether it can be read and written correctly.


＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) The PIO device may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.


5-13

5.5.1.5 NVRAM (0010)

＜Description＞ Check whether the NVRAM read/write (specific blank area) can be performed correctly and whether engine parameters can be read correctly by check-sum. The RTC (Real Time Clock) test is not performed. This error means damage of the IC or parameter error. When this error was occurred at power-on-self diagnosis (POC), perform read/write check and read check-sum three times. If the error cannot be solved, the NVRAM contents at the previous powering OFF is reloaded and engine error 11Ax (x: 2, 3, 4) is displayed. (In this case, E0010 will not be displayed.) When other errors NVRAM error is occurred, the above recovery is not performed and this error code is only displayed.

＜Defective module＞ (1) NVRAM (2) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ When multiple errors that includes NVRAM have occurred, take a measure for errors except NVRAM, first. Turn on the printer after solving the errors except NVRAM. Only NVRAM error recovery will be performed. The NVRAM is not backed up error condition. If error 11Ax is occurred even at turning on the printer, take appropriate measure by following to engine error 11Ax.

5-14

＜Measure to be taken when the error cannot be soled by auto- error correction＞ The damage of the backed up contents of the NVRAM, NVRAM device defectives, or IPB1 board defectives will be possible. Take appropriate measure by following to the NVRAM Error Measure, Flow Diagram.

NVRAM Error Measure Flow Diagram

POC, NVRAM error(E0010)

NVRAM INIT

(Cause) • Parameter sum check error • Write / Read check error

Power on the printer (OFF/ON)

Check mount of the NVRAM and WIM1.

OK：NVRAM chip is not inferior.

NG：NVRAM chip malfunction or hardware malfunction.

NG：Mounting inferior

Mount the NVRAM and WIN1 again.


Replace the NVRAM

NVRAM INIT

Replace the WEC board

NVRAM INIT

Do you replace the board?

Input the NVRAM parameter on the operation panel

End End

Restore SETTING

Restore NVRAM


Check whether the NVRAM is mounted on the WEC board correctly.

NOTE1

OK

OK NG

OK NO

YES

OK

NG See Section 5.8 (3)



NG

NG

OK

NVRAM inferior


5-15

5.5.1.6 FPGA (IPB) (0020)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the FPGA-ATG and FPGA-RSM registers on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.


＜Measure to be taken＞ Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.7 FPGA (ICB) (0040)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the FPGA-PTC and FPGA-PDD registers on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.

＜Defective module＞ (1) IPB1 board (2) Carriage cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Replace the ICB1 board. (2) Check whether the carriage cable is plugged or not. (3) Replace IPB1 board.

5.5.1.8 ASIC CONF (IPB1) (0080)

＜Description＞ The program load from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to the ASIC on the IPB1 board or sum-check was not performed correctly, and an error was occurred.


＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Reload the ASIC program from the IC card. (2) Replace the IPB1 board.

5-16

5.5.1.9 ASIC CONF (ICB1) (0100)

＜Description＞ The program load from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to the ASIC on the ICB1 board or sum-check was not performed correctly, and an error was occurred.

＜Defective module＞ (1) IPB1 board (2) Carriage cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Reload the ASIC program from the IC card. (2) Check whether the carriage cable is plugged correctly. (3) Replace the ICB1 board. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.10 SCSI board (0200)

＜Description＞ The WIM1 board is not installed.

＜Defective module＞ (1) WIM1 board (2) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check whether the WIM1 board is installed correctly. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace

the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.11 SCSI register (0400)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the SCSI protocol controller on the WIM1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.

＜Defective module＞ (1) WIM1 board (2) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check whether the WIM1 board is installed correctly. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace

the IPB1 board.


5-17

5.5.1.12 DRAM (0200)

＜Description＞ The read/write of the image band memory on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.


＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.1.13 POWER SUPPLY (+36, +24, +12 V) (800)

＜Description＞ The power supplies of +36, +24, and +12 V PC are diagnosed, and the power supplies could not be detected.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Interlock switch or wire harness of the rear cover. (2) Fuses (F1, F2, F3) on the IPB1 board. (3) Power supply unit and wire harness (3) (4) IPB1 board

When the power supply is in short-circuit; (5) ICB1 board and FFC (4) (6) VDD2 board (7) Others

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check interlock switch

Observe lighting condition of LED2 (+ 5 V), LED7 (+ 12 V), LED9 (+ 24 V), LED11 (+ 36 VM), and LED13 (+ 36 VH) on the IPB1 board.

+ 36 VM and + 36 VH are distributed from one power supply source, but they are separated for convenience on the IPB1 board. + 36 VM is applied for motors. + 36 VH is applied for head drive. If the rear cover is not closed correctly, 36 V may not be applied.

(2) Turn off the power, measure resistance of fuses to check. (3) Check whether correct voltages are supplied from the power source. (See tables) (4) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace

the IPB1 board.

5-18

(5) Check whether the power is in short-circuit or not. The power source has a over-current protection circuit. When over-current on the + 5 V (short-circuit) is detected, all DC outputs are turned off.

When over-current on + 12 V, + 24 V, or 36 V (short-circuit) is detected, three DC outputs except 5 V are turned off. Measure a resistance of the DC cable after unplugging CN on the IPB1 board. If the resistance is extremely low, the power is in short-circuit. Note that the power does not supplied for a while, 10 minutes after turning on.

Check points of the power supply voltages

Power line Measuring position (on the IPB1 board) Normal value

5V TP35 +4.75V to +5.25V +12V TP50 +11.00V to +13.00V +24V TP34 +23.00V to +25.00V +36V TP93, TP33 +35.00V to +37.00V

Check points of the power supply voltages

Power line Measuring position (on the IPB1 board) Normal value

+1.5V TP70 +1.45V to +1.55V +3.3V TP69 +3.20V to +3.40V

+5VREF TP36 +4.90V to +5.10V

＜Note＞ Use the power supply JLSI-005C1 specified for the IP-6600 printer. Some nations require revision B or later power supply from safety regulations. The revision of the power supply is shown in the last figure of the serial number. (Example: 3AJ0001A ---- Version A)


5-19

5.5.2 Engine error

An error is detected in the engine.

Restart the engine. If the error is not solved, contact our service centers.

Get information of error condition; time of occurrence, frequency of the error, operation right before error occurrence, and operating temperature.

When an engine error is occurred, take the following measures;

(1) Replace the module that is specified as a defective part I the error message. (2) When multiple defective parts are possible, separate the defective part.

Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT Power-on in the Special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10), and check whether the circuit works correctly using actuator function and monitor function.

These functions can be performed even when an engine error is occurred. When the rear cover is opened, 36 V is not supplied.

Error description Error state display GA_ATG block clear error ENGINE ERROR 1110 GA_ATG DMA transfer error ENGINE ERROR 1111

Vacuum fan error ENGINE ERROR 112X [x: 0: wipe 1: center 2: cap]

Flash PROM write error ENGINE ERROR 1140 Home position sensor error ENGINE ERROR 1150 Wiping motor, wiping sensor error ENGINE ERROR 1160 Temperature sensor error ENGINE ERROR 1170 Capping motor error ENGINE ERROR 1180

VDD2 variable power error ENGINE ERROR 119x [x: channel number]

NVRAM error ENGINE ERROR 11AX [x: error number (*4)]

Up date error ENGINE ERROR 11B0 Cap position error ENGINE ERROR 11C0 Cooling fan error ENGINE ERROR 11D0 Long term storage error ENGINE ERROR 11E0

Head drive IC error ENGINE ERROR 120x [x: thermistor number (*2)]

Head temperature error ENGINE ERROR 121x [x: head number(*1)]

Edge sensor error ENGINE ERROR 1220

Sub-tank sensor (Full or Half) error ENGINE ERROR 123x [X: head number (*1)]

Ink supply sensor error ENGINE ERROR 124x [X: head number (*1)]

Sub tank supply error ENGINE ERROR 125x [X: head number (*1)]

FFC cable connection error ENGINE ERROR 126x [ (*3)] Servo motor error ENGINE ERROR 1700

*1) x: 0= No. 1 head, 1= No. 2 head.....5= No. 6 head *2) x: 0= TH2, 1= TH6, 2= TH3, 3= TH7, 4= TH4, 5= TH8, 6= TH5 (Thx: Location on

ICB board.) *3) x: 0= CN9, 1= CN10, 2= CN11, 3= CN12 cables *4) x: 0.2= sum error, 3= version error, 4= read/write error

5-20

5.5.2.1 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG block clear error

＜Description＞ The ATG band memory block erase does not end. This error is checked at power on start and print.



5.5.2.2 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG DMA error

＜Description＞ The DMA circuit is in the input part of the FPGA-ATG on the IPB1 board and the drawing data from the host PC is received via the WIM board. This error shows some error exist in the data path. This error is checked during print.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Host PC or SCSI cable (2) WIM1 board (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check whether a host PC and a SCSI cable are connected correctly and there is

no defect in the host side. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.2.3 Engine error 112X: Vacuum fan error

＜Description＞ x= 0: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, wipe side) does not run. x= 1: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, center) does not run. x= 2: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, cap side) does not run. This error is checked at print.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Vacuum fan (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board


5-21

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT Power on in the

Special Power on Procedure (See 5.9), and check whether the fan motor rotates correctly by controlling the fan motor in the actuator menu.

(2) Replace the vacuum fan. (3) Check the sensor cable. (4) When this error cannot be solved even though the fan is replaced, there is a

possibility of defect of the drive circuit. Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.2.4 Engine error 1140: Flash ROM write error

＜Description＞ A time-out error occurs when the NVRAM contents are being saved in the flash memory in maintenance mode. Erasing does not end. This error is checked at shut down of the printer and back up from the operation panel.



5.5.2.5 Engine error 1150: Home position sensor error

＜Description＞ The carriage cannot be moved to its home position. This error is checked at power-on-start of the printer and closing the rear cover.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Home position sensor (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Enter the maintenance mode by performing CANCEL-SHIFT power-on in the

Special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10). Enter the Home Position Sensor menu from the Monitor menu. Check whether “1” is displayed when the carriage is in its home position. In the condition that the Y motor is not excited at open state of the cap, check whether the display is changed when the carriage is moved manually. (Note so that the ink does not drop.)

(2) Check the sensor cable whether there is no disconnect on of connectors and no cutting of harnesses.


5-22

5.5.2.6 Engine error 1160: Wiping error

＜Description＞ When the wiping motor is run for a while, the sensor does not make a response that indicates that the motor turns one turn. This error is checked during wipe.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Wiping unit (including wiping motor and wipe sensor.) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ Check whether the wiper turns one turn and the wipe sensor detects the turn during the initializing sequence at powering on the printer.

A． When the wiper does not turn.

(1) Check whether there is no step-out of the gears when the wiper does not turn one turn even though the motor turns.

(2) Check whether 24 V is supplied to the IPB1 board with the circuit tester when the motor does not turn. When the motor does not turn even though the + 24 V is supplied, there is a possibility of the capping motor defect. Replace the capping unit.

(3) Check the sensor cable. (4) There is a possibility of a motor drive circuit defect. Replace the IPB1 board.

B． When the wiper turns

(1) Check whether the wipe sensor can be switched ON and OFF by rotating the wiper. Check whether the lever type switch is not loosen.

(2) Check the sensor cable. (3) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.2.7 Engine error 1170: Temperature sensor error

＜Description＞ The thermistor for temperature measurement in the printer detects an abnormal temperature. (-10°C or lower or 85°C or higher) This error is checked at all times.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Ambient thermistor sensor (AMB THRM ASSY) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Use the printer under the print guaranteed temperature range.

When the ambient temperature is -10 °C or lower or 85 °C or higher. (2) Replace the ambient temperature sensor. (3) Check the sensor cable. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.


5-23

5.5.2.8 Engine error 1180: Capping motor error

＜Description＞ Capping motor over current is detected. The error also occurs when the load of the capping motor is extremely high. This error is checked at all times.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Capping unit (tube, pump motor) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) When the ambient temperature is low, a tube of the pump motor becomes hard

and load of the motor is increased. Use the printer under the operation guaranteed temperature range.

(2) The capping unit has a torque timitter for up and down operation. Therefore, the capping unit does not occurs over current.

(3) The rotation of the capping unit gear is worse, put grease on the shaft of the gear. (4) Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT power-on in the

special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10). Enter the pump solenoids 1 and 2 from the actuator menu, and open the fresh air by turning on the solenoids 1 and 2. Enter the pump motor and check whether the motor drive circuit and the motor work correctly by rotationing the motor back and forward. When the home position parameter is set to “0”, it is judged that the home position is not adjusted and the capping is not available. (The forward rotation of the pump motor is not available even in the actuator menu.) Check whether connectors are not off and harnesses are not cut.

(5) When the motor cannot be rotated, replace the capping unit. (6) Check the sensor cable. (7) Replace the IPB1 board.

5-24

5.5.2.9 Engine error 119X: VDD2 variable power supply error

＜Description＞ Output voltages of the VDD2 board are abnormal. ON wave voltage and OFF wave voltage should be more than 12 V and more than 6 V respectively.

This error is checked during print.

X= Channel Head Use Voltage (*1) Check point LED

0 Ch1 Lc, Y for ON wave 20 to 24V TP4: PWON1 D27

1 Ch2 Bk, Lm for ON wave 20 to 24V TP5: PWON1 D30

2 Ch3 M, C for ON wave 20 to 24V TP6: PWON1 D33

3 Ch4 Lc, Y for OFF wave 12 to 14V TP7: PWOFF 1 D26

4 Ch5 Bk, Lm for OFF wave 12 to 14V TP8: PWOFF 1 D29

5 Ch6 M, C for OFF wave 12 to 14V TP9: PWOFF 1 D32

(*1) Normal output voltage at normal temperature.

＜Defective module＞ (1) ICB1 board (2) VDD2 board (3) Carridge cable (4) IPB1 board (5) Main power supply (6) Defective interlock switch

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check whether 36 V is supplied to the IPB1 board. If not, the followings are

considerable causes. ・Main power supply defect ・The rear cover is opened

(2) Preset the VDD voltage from the diagnostics menu. Check voltages of the channels that occur errors on the ICB1 board by a circuit tester. The voltage supply condition is check at the LEDs.

(3) When the voltage is supplied, the voltage check circuit is defective. Replace the ICB1 board. AD converters for checking the voltage level are on the ICB1 board.

(4) When the voltage is not supplied, replace the VDD2 board. (5) There is a possibility of short-circuit of the VDD2 output line.

Perform short-circuit test on the ICB1 board. Check whether the carridge cable is not damaged. Preset voltage for VDD + 4 V” is output as the VDD2 voltage.

LEDs and Check pins around CN12 on the ICB1 board.

5V

12V

24V

TP1 TP4

D27

TP6

TP5

D30

D33

TP7

D26

TP9

TP8

D29

D32

D28

D31

D34

TP2

TP3


5-25

5.5.2.10 Engine error 11AX: NVRAM error

＜Description＞ The data in the NVRAM is incorrect. The self diagnosis at powering on checks read/write and sum-check errors. Internally the program retries those checks three times and when this error cannot be solved in three time checks, the data in the NVRAM backed up at the previous powering off is written to the NVRAM and this error is displayed. 11A0=Check-sum error (during operation) 11A2=Check-sum error 11A3=Version error 11A4=Read/write error When a check-sum error is detected at revise of data of the NVRAM, this error is displayed. Related section: 5.5.1 Self-diagnostic errors at power on (5.5.1.5 NVRAM)

3.5 System Information Management

＜Defective module＞ (1) NVRAM (2) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ Turn on the printer again and check whether the error is solved. When the error cannot be solved, turn on the printer by skipping the POC. Initialize the NVRAM and restore the back up information. Turn on the printer again after powering off. When the error cannot be solved, restore setting value at shipping and turn on the printer after turning off. If the error cannot be solved yet, there is a possibility of mounting defect of the NVRAM to the IC socket. Check whether the NVRAM is mounted to the IC socket correctly. If the NVRAM is mounted upside down or in the wrong position, the NVRAM is broken. Replace the NVRAM. When the error cannot be solved by remounting the NVRAM correctly, replace the NVRAM. If the error cannot be solved yet, replace the IPB1 board.

5-26

5.5.2.11 Engine error 11C0: Cap position error

＜Description＞ The error is displayed when there is more than 2 mm gap of position detected by two carridge position sensors at capping operation. Two carridge position sensors: PWMGA on the IPB board and PTG (FPGA) on the ICB board.

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Verify that there is no stain on the T-fence. (2) Verify that the linear scale is mounted correctly and the connector is connected

correctly. (3) Verify that the FFC cable and the connector are connected correctly. (4) Replace ICB board. (5) Replace IBP board.

5.5.2.12 Engine error 11D0: Cooling fan error

＜Description＞ When the head temperature becomes more than 43°C, the printer observes whether the head temperature drops under 43°C during print. This error is displayed as cooling fan error when the head temperature cannot become under 43°C for 10 minutes.

＜Measure to be taken＞ Verify that the head cooling fan works good. If the head cooling fan does not work good, replace the fan. Verify that the printer cooling fan works good. If the printer cooling fan does not work good, replace the fan.

5.5.2.13 Engine error 11E0: Long term strage error

＜Description＞ When the printer has been left in power off state for more than one month (31 days) , user unrecoverable error is displayed. When the service clean (for long term storage) is performed before turing the printer off, this error is not displayed. When the head wash (return sequence after service clean) is performed, the printer returns to the ormal error observation state. This error cannot be cleared by normal power ON/OFF.

＜Measure to be taken＞ Turn the printer on by error skip mode ( + + POWE ), input the passward, and initialize the internal error flag. Clear the error by turning the printer off (not turning the breaker off) and turning the printer on again. Before restarting the printer: (1) Replace the pump assy. (2) Replace the waste ink tube. (3) Check that hardened ink sticks to inner wall of the supply pump tube, and if so, replace the supply tube.

POWER


5-27

5.5.2.14 Engine error 120X: Head drive IC error

＜Description＞ The piezo drive IC on a head is too hot (85 °C or higher) or too low (-10 °C or lower). The head drive voltage + 4 V that is supplied to the VDD board is generated from 36 V power supply. The ICB1 board that has a 2nd voltage control circuit generates the accurate voltage needed for the head. The 2nd voltage control circuit is easy to hot. This error is check at all times.

＜Defective module＞ (1) ICB1 board (2) Head cable (3) Head

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check temperature of the head drive circuit on the ICB1 board. If it is extremely

high, check short-circuit of the head and head cable corresponding to the element using a tester. Short-circuit may be caused by incorrect insertion of the head cable, internal failure of the head, or foreign matter attached to the ICB1 board.

(2) Replace the head. (3) Replace the ICB1 board.

5.5.2.15 Engine error 121X: Head temperature error x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm), .....5= No. 6 head (Lc)

＜Description＞ The head temperature is too low or too high (- 10 °C or lower, 85 °C or higher). (The that measure the PZT temperature malfunction.) When the head temperature rises at normal print, the temperature control such as addition of wait time words so that the temperature does not exceed 40 °C .

＜Defective module＞ (1) Head cable (2) ICB1 board (3) Head

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) When the actual environmental temperature is not abnormal, there is a possibility

of cut of the circuit. Identify the errored color head from the lowest digit figure in the error number and check whether cables are connected securely and the head cable is not damaged.

(2) The A/D conversion circuit is on the ICB1 board. Therefore, replace the ICB1 board.

(3) Rarely there is a possibility of the thermistor malfunction in the head.

5-28

5.5.2.16 Engine error 1220: Edge sensor error

＜Description＞ The printer checks the paper width during the initializing sequence at powering on. The printer adjusts sensibility of the edge sensor using unreftected tape or the platen where the paper does not exist. If the desired sensitivity cannot be obtaind at adjustment, this error is generated. If paper or foreign material exists on the check point on the unreflected tape, the printer cannot adjust correctly and this error is generated.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Edge sensor module (2) ICB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Enter to the maintenance mode using cancel-shift powering on described on “5.9

Special Power-On Procedure”. Enter to the edge sensor in the engine sensors from the monitor menu. Check whether there is a response when the white paper is inserted and drawed under the edge sensor. When there is a response, the edge sensor words correctly.

(2) When there is no response, replace the edge sensor. (3) Replace the ICB1 board. The ICB1 board converts the sensor lever analog to

digital value.

5.5.2.17 Engine error 123x: Sub-tank sensor error (Full or Half)

＜Description＞ x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm) ....5= No. 6 head (C) The half sensors and full sensors on the sub-tanks are defective. The sensors detect full state even though the sub-tank is not in half state actually. This error is checked during print. Sensor logic (Both sensors generate “1” if the connector is disconnected)

Empty More than half and less the full Full Connector

disconnection Connector

disconnection

Half sensor 1 0 0 1 x

Full sensor 0 0 1 x 1

When the half sensor is defective, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected at full state and the error is generated. When the full sensor is defective, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected at empty state (at ink initial charge), the error is generated. Also, the ink is detected as full at the state that the ink is more than half and less than full, so the ink cannot be charged more than this and when the ink is less than half, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected and the error is generated.


5-29

＜Defective module＞ (1) Sub-tank sensor: Half, Full (2) Sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R), Sub-tank sensor cable (L/R) (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Enter to the maintenance mode using cancel-shift powering on described in “5.10

Specia Power-On Procedure”. Enter to the sub-tank sensor full x half x (x= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. When there is a response of the sensor by moving the sensor plate of the sub-tank manually, the sensor works correctly. When the connector of the sensor is disconnected, the full sensor turns to “1” (full state) and the half sensor turns to !1” (empty state).

(2) Replace no responsible sensors. (3) Check whether the sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R) and sub-tank sensor cable

(L/R) are connected securely and correctly and replace them. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.2.18 Engine error 124x: Ink supply sensor error

＜Description＞ The ink supply sensor does not change even though the specified time is passed after driving the ink supply motor for the sub-tank x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm), ....5= No. 6 head (C). This error is checked at ink supply.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Ink supply sensor (2) Ink supply motor (3) Ink motor L/R cable (4) Ink motor relay cable (5) Ink motor sensor relay cable (6) Ink supply unit (7) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in

“5.10 Special Power-On Procedure.” Enter to the sub-tank sensor ink supply x (x= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. When there is a response at the time that the reflection plate turns white and black by moving the gear manually, the sensor work correctly.

(2) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in “5.10 Special Power-On Procedure.” Enter to the ink supply motor x from the actuator menu and preset it “NORMAL” to drive the motor. When the sub-tank is already in the full state, this is not checked. Therefore, ink should be discharged. Stop the motor immediately after checking the motor drive. Note that always do not charge too much ink to the sub-tank. Note that ink may be dropped from the head when the internal pressure of the sub-tank is extremely high.

(3) Replace the corresponded motor, sensor, or cable when the ink supply sensor does not word correctly.

(4) Replace the ink supply unit. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.

5-30

5.5.2.19 Engine error 125x: Sub-tank supply error

＜Description＞ x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm)....,5= No. 6 head (Lc). The sub-tank sensor does not turn to less than half even though the ink is consumed. This error is checked at ink supply.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Sub tank sensor: Half, Full (2) Sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R), Sub-tank sensor cable (L/R) (3) IPB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) When the sub-tank is in full state, enter to the maintenance mode using the

cancel-shift powering on described in “5.9 Special Power-On Procedure.” Enter to the pump solenoid 1.2 from the actuator menu and cut the outside air by turning it OFF. Enter to the pump motor and discharge the ink of the sub-tank by driving the pump motor forward. Check whether the ink supply motor drives by turning the power on again when the ink is little. If the motor is not driven, replace the corresponded cable, ink supply motor unit.

(2) Check whether the sensor plate of the sub-tank sensor works correctly. Check whether no foreign material that is blocking the sensor action is not caught

in the cantilever. (3) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in

“5.10 Special Power-On Procedure.” Enter to the sub-tank sensor ink supply x (s= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. Check whether there is a response of the sensor for display of black/white part by rotating the corresponded gear manually. If there is not response, replace the sensor.

(4) Replace the ink supply sensor cable. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.


5-31

5.5.2.20 Engine error 126x: FFC cable connection error

＜Description＞ The FFC cables connected to the CN9, CN10, CN11, AND CN12 are defecting. (x: 0= CN9, 1= CN10, 2= CN11, 3= CN12) Four FFC (carridge cables) to the carridge are disconnected. When either side of four FFC is floated, the floating sensor lines assigned to both sides are opened and the error is generated. This error is checked during print.

＜Defective module＞ (1) Carriage cable (2) IPB1 board (3) ICB1 board

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Insert the carriage cable again. (ICB1 side and IPB1 side) (2) Check whether there is no damage on the carriage cable. (3) If the error still persists, replace the ICB1 board. (4) If the error still persists, replace the IPB1 board.

5.5.2.21 Engine error 1700x: Servo error

＜Description＞ An error occurs in the servo task. The X motor or Y motor move the carriage, but the input from the linear encorder does not change. Or no interrupt occurs from the PWM gate array. This error is checked at operation of the X motor or Y motor.

＜Defective module＞ (1) X motor (2) Y motor (3) DC motor cable ASSY (4) Motor encorder cable ASSY (5) IPB1 board (6) Grit roller gears (7) Carriage gears (8) Linear scale (T-fence) (9) Linear encorder (10) ICB1 board (11) CARRIAGE CABLE (CN10)

5-32

＜Measure to be taken＞ (1) Check whether there is no jam. (2) Check whether CN14 and CN17 on the IPB1 board are connected correctly. (3) Check whether the carriage cable (FFC to be connected to CN10) is connected to

the IPB1 and the ICB1 boards correctly. (4) Check whether the linear encorder on the ICB1 board is attached correctly. (5) Check whether there is no scratch or no stain on the linear scale. (6) Check whether the grit roller gears work correctly. (7) Check whether the carriage gears work correctly. (8) Replace the IPB1 board. (9) Replace the X motor or Y motor.


5-33

5.5.3 System errors

An unrecoverable system exception interrupt occurs in the engine.

The error codes are listed below.

Error description Error state display

Operation code exception F_es : 0001

Slot illegal exception F_es : 0002

Address exception F_es : 0003

DMA error F_es : 0004

NMI occurrence (WatchDog error) F_es : 0005

＜Measure to be taken＞ Ask the user about the situation of error occurrence, replace the WEC board or engine F/W.

F_es : nnnn POWER OFF/ON

nnnn: Error code

5-34

5.6 Engine F/W composition and Version Up

5.6.1 Engine F/W Composition

The engine F/W includes two types of programs: boot and engine control programs • The engine F/W includes two types of programs: boot and engine control programs • Engine control program: Controls the engine components and carries out printing and

error processing.

Combination between engine firmware IC cards for maintenance service and engine boards are shown in the following table. (See table.)

IP-6600

Boot program Ver.1.10 or later

System program Ver.1.02 or later

IC-Card 1-card One IC card which includes boot and system program.

IPBl Yes (work)

Downgrading of engine F/W from V2.** to V1.** is not allowed.

NOTE


5-35

5.6.2 Engine F/W Version UP

(1) Boot program version up

(1) Turn the power off. (2) Remove the masking plate on the front cover. (3) For PCB-ASSY-IPB1 board, set bit1 of SW10 to ON and bit2 to OFF. (4) Install the boot program IC card in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. (5) Turn the power on. (6) When LED 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board, writing ends. (7) Turn the power off.(Push POWER switch on the operation panel for approximately 5

seconds and release it.) (8) For PCB-ASSY-IPB1 board, set bit1 of SW10 to OFF and bit2 to ON. (9) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover.

The errors that may be displayed during boot program version up are listed below.

Error description Display method Measure

CPU exception occurs during program writing.

- General illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 lights on the IPB1 board. - Slot illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 3 lights on the IPB1 board. - CPU address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board. - DMAC address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 5 lights on the IPB1 board. - MNI: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 1 and 5 light on the IPB1 board.

Install another boot program IC card. If the program does not work, replace the IPB1 board.

(2) Engine control program version up

(1) Turn the power off. (2) Remove the masking plate on the front cover. (3) For PCB-ASS-IPB1 board, set bit 1 of SW10 to ON and bit 2 to OFF.

(Normally, this is the default, so this step can be omitted.) (4) Install the boot program IC card in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. (5) Turn the power on. (6) When the engine control program is written, the following is displayed.

Operation panel LCD display: "Erase.." → "Copy.." → "Copy End" (Writing end)

IPB1 board LED display: All LEDs off→LEDs 1, 3, 5, 6, 8 AND 10 light. (delete)→Only LED 4 lights. (Writing end)

(7) Turn the power off. (8) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover.

5-36

The errors that may be displayed during engine control program version up are listed below.

Error description Display method Measure

An invalid IC card is installed.

LCD: Illegal IC Card LEDs 1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 : off

Install a correct engine control program IC card.

CPU exception occurs during program writing.

- General illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 lights on the IPB1 board. - Slot illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 3 lights on the IPB1 board. - CPU address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board. - DMAC address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 5 lights on the IPB1 board. - MNI: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 and 5 light on the IPB1 board.

Install another engine control program IC card. If the program does not work, replace the IPB1 board.


5-37

5.7 ASIC Program Composition and Version Up

5.7.1 ASIC Program Composition

The CPU writes programs stored into the flash memory to ATG, RSM, PTC, and PDD.

5.7.2 ASIC Program Version Up

(1) Turn the power off. (2) Remove the masking plate on the front cover. (3) For PCB-ASSY-IPB1, set bit 1 of SW10 to ON and bit 2 to OFF. (4) Install the CFG card* in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. (5) Turn the power ON. (6) When COPY 1 to 4 and on the operation panel and COPY END is displayed, writing

ends. (7) Turn the power OFF. (8) For IPB1 board, set the bit 1 of SW10 to OFF and bit 2 to ON. (9) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover.

* Combination between IPB1 board version and CFG card

IPB1 board CFG card

Version 00 (U00080931300) CFG card (IPB1-00) (U000847394**)

Version 01 (U00080931301) CFG card (IPB1-01) (U000847405**)

Flash memory

CPU

ATG RSM PTC PDD

IPB1 board ICB1 board

5-38

5.8 Upgrading Heater F/W

5.8.1 Heater F/W Composition

Firmware for controlling the heater unit is contained in the heater operation panel (HCP board) of this printer. This firmware can be updated from the IC card inserted in the IPB1 board.

5.8.2 How to Upgrade Heater F/W

(1) Remove the front cover window.

(2) Upgrade the heater F/W according to the procedure in “3.1.2 System Menu, (18) Heater F/W version UP.”

(3) Turn off the power.

(4) Remove the IC card.

(5) Mount the front cover window.

(6) Turn on the power.

NOTE 1) Association with the engine F/W

The function of uploading the heater F/W from the IC card is available for the engine F/W V1.5x and later versions and heater F/W V2.1 and later versions. To use this uploading function with an older engine F/W version, the engine F/W should be upgraded before upgrading the heater F/W.

NOTE 2) Unsuccessful uploading

If the write of heater F/W terminates unsuccessfully due to an unexpected event like power OFF during uploading, restart by overwrite is not possible. Uploading takes 140 to 150 seconds (the time “*” on the operation panel is blinking). Do not turn off the power, pull out the IC card, or any other thing to cause the failure of write operation during uploading.

IC card used for upgrading heater F/W

Name U code

Heater F/W (64) card U000898762

Flash memory IC card I

IPB1

CPU

Heater operation panel (HCP board)


5-39

5.9 Setting During Engine Board (IPB1) Replacement

(1) If the NVRAM is not defective (If only the engine board is defective)

＜Operation＞

If the NVRAM on the current engine board can be installed on a new engine board, do as follow:

(1) Remove the NVRAM on the current engine board and install it on a new engine board, and replace the board with the new one.

• Rewrite the engine F/W if necessary.

(2) Start the printer.

(3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode:

• SAVE SETTING: Save the contents of the NVRAM in the factory setting area of the flash memory.

• SAVE NVRAM: Save the contents of the NVRAM in the backup area of the flash memory.

See “3.5 System Information Management” for a flow and management of system information of the NVRAM and flash memory by the print engine.

Start

Install a NVRAM into a new engine board.

Turn the printer on.

Do as follows on the operation panel in SYSTEM menu of the engine maintenance mode: ・SAVE SETTING ・SAVE NVRAM

End

＜Procedure＞

Downgrading of engine F/W from V2.** to V1.** is not allowed.

NOTE

5-40

(2) If the NVRAM fails and is replaced (Only the NVRAM is defective)

＜Operation＞

If a new NVRAM is installed on the current engine board, do as follows:

(1) Install the new NVRAM on the current engine board.

• Rewrite engine F/W if necessary.

(2) Skip the POC and start the printer.

• Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip the POC and start the printer.

• The language on the operation panel is shown in English because the printer turns on in NVRAM error with the uninitialized NVRAM.

(3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode:

• NVRAM INIT: Initialize the NVRAM.

• RESTORE NVRAM: Restore the contents of the backup area of the flash memory to the NVRAM.

(4) Turn the power OFF and ON again to restart.

Start

Install a new NVRAM to the current engine board.

Turn the power On by pressing the key

and the Power ON key. (Skip the POC and start the

printer.)

Do as follow on the operation panel from theSYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: ・NVRAM INIT ・RESTORE NVRAM

＜Procedure＞

End

Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ON again.


5-41

(3) If both the NVRAM and engine board are replaced (both are defective)

When both the NVRAM and engine board are replaced simultaneously, mechanical correction value parameters, running distance, and so on are lost. Therefore, it must be avoided. Although it depends on the degree of defect, try to perform step 1 or 2 above and make use of the NVRAM data or the contents of the backup area of the flash memory.

If the engine system data cannot be used, do as follows:

＜Operation＞

(1) Install a new engine board.

• Rewrite engine F/W if necessary

(2) Skip the POC and start the printer.

• Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip printer.

• The language on the operation panel is shown in English because the printer turns on in NVRAM error with the uninitialized NVRAM.

(3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode:

• NVRAM INIT: Initialize the NVRAM.

• LANGUAGE: Select Japanese for messages displayed on the LCD (in Japan).

(4) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode:

• SYSTEM DATE : Set a date (year, month, day) .

• SYSTEM TIME : Set a time (hour, minute, second).

• SERIAL NO. : Set a serial number of the printer.

(5) Turn the power OFF and ON again with error recovery skip to restart.

• Press the key and the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip the error recovery and start the printer.

(6) Do as follows on the operation panel from the MEC.ADJ menu in the maintenance mode:

• EDGE SENSOR ADJ: Register the platen’s maximum value read by the edge sensor to the NVRAM automatically.



<If a record remains>

• If a record of the mechanical adjustment parameters for the print engine remains, input correction values for mechanical and head adjustment with no adjustment.

<If a record does not remain>

• Do mechanical adjustment, and then input correction values.

5-42

<Correction values related to mechanical adjustment and head adjustment>

• Cap Position Correction: See 8.9 Cap Position Correction

• Wiping Position Correction: See 8.7 Wiping Position Correction

• Head Drive Voltage Setting: See 8.14 Head Drive Voltage Setting

• Head Position Correction: See 8.17 Head Position Correction

• Bi-direction Print Position Correction: See 8.18 Bi-direction Print Position Correction

• Paper Feed Amount Correction: See 8.20 Paper Feed Amount Correction

• Side Margin Position Correction: See 8.22 Side Margin Position Correction

• Top Margin Position Correction: See 8.23 Top Margin Position Correction

• Bottom Margin Position Correction: See 8.23 Bottom Margin Position Correction

(9) Do as follows on the operation panel from the H.MNTE menu in the maintenance mode:

• AUTO CLEANING : Set to “ON”.

• INK CHARGE MODE : Set to “FINISHED”.

(10) Do as folloes on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode:

• SAVE SETTING: Save contents of the NVRAM to the factory setting area of the flash memory.

• SAVE NVRAM: Save contents of the NVRAM to the backup area of the flash memory.

(11) Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ON to restart the printer.

＜Procedure＞

Start

Install a new engine board

Turn the power ON by pressing the key and the Power ON key.

(Skip the POC and start the printer.)

Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: • NVRAM INIT • LANGUAGE: Select Japanese (in Japan).


5-43

Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: • SYSTEM DATE : Set a date • SYSTEM TIME : Set a time • SERIAL NO. : Set a serial number.

Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power by pressing the key, key, and Power ON key. (Skip the error recovery and start the printer.)

Do as follows on the operation panel from the MADJUST menu in the engine maintenance mode: • EDGE SENS ADJ

Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ONagain.

Input correction values for the mechanical adjustment and head adjustment to the printer. • If a record remains in the printer, only input parameters. • If a record does not remain in the printer, adjust again.

Do as follows on the operation panel from the H. MAINT menu in the engine maintenance mode: • AUTO CLEANING : Set to “ON”. • INK CHARGE MODE : Set to “FINISHED”.

Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: • SAVE SETTING • SAVE NVRAM

Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ON again.

End

5-44

5.10 Special Power-On Procedure

The printer starts according to the normal sequence by turning ON the power switch on the operation panel. The following power-on sequence can be used for troubleshooting or special operation.

(1) Power On Skip the POC of the engine. The printer can be started by the following procedure without performing the engine

POC.

・ Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time.

It is useful to change menu setting when a POC error occurs. Keep pressing the key until “INITIALIZING” is displayed on the operation

panel.

(2) , Power On Skip the error recovery of the engine. The printer can be started by the following procedure without performing the error

recovery of the engine.

(1) Press the key, the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time.

(1) The printer starts without performing the error recovery and the password input display appears. (When an error engine error exists, the engine error message is displayed. However, go step 3.)

(1) Put a password (Press the , , and keys).Top menu of the engine maintenance mode appears.

There is a case that the Err message is displayed continuously without entering the engine maintenance mode. In that case, go forward with any keys.

Operations after skipping the error recovery differ from the operations for normal starting by pressing the power switch in the following points:

(1) The printer works in the engine maintenance mode. (2) The printer requires no recovery operation for errors (i.e. no paper). Panel operation

is available. However, close the rear cover at rear cover open error. (3) The printer leaves the menu without performing the adjust pattern print. (4) The printer leaves the menu without performing the cleaning.

Skipping the error recovery of the engine are useful for the following cases:

(1) Ink draining without paper setting Ink drawing can be performed without paper setting at reinstallation of the printer. At

normal starting of the printer, the operation panel cannot be operated without paper setting.

(2) Recovery of the damaged NVRAM When the NVRAM is damaged and an engine error occurs during operation, the

damaged NVRAM can be recovered in the engine maintenance mode on the operation panel.


5-45

5.11 Countermeasures for No Error Message

(1) When no error message appears on the operation panel. Run the Booting program to display “Booting” on the operation panel.

If “Booting” does not appear on the operation panel, do the followings: • Check whether the operation panel works correctly. • Write Boot program. • Replace the IPB1 board. • Write ASIC program.

(2) When the printer displays “Booting” on the operation panel, but freezes action.

The Boot program performs H/W POC after displaying “Booting” on the operation panel, and then copies the SYSTEM program to the SRAM.

If the printer freezes action after displaying “Booting” on the operation panel, do the followings: • Rewrite the SYSTEM program. • Start the printer after removing the WIM1 board. If the problem is fixed, replace the

WIM1 board. • Write ASIC program.

Table 5-1 Booting Action List

PROGRAM LED

(1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14)

LED (2, 4, 7, 9,

11, 13)

DC power ON/0FF

F/W processing Operation panel display (SCSI)

Operation panel display (at POCerror)

all ON LED2, 4 ON

+5 V ON

BOOT program +LED7 ON

+12 V

Start Boot program on the flash memory. HW check in POC (flash, internal RAM, SDRAM) Copy system program on SRAM and jump. HW check in POC (power supply, NVRAM, CPGA, etc.)

Booting

Booting

SYSTEM program all OFF LED1: Lit. LED14: Faint lit.

+LED9, 11, 13 ON

+24 V ON +36 V ON +36 V OFF +24 V ON

+24V ON +36V ON

Power supply check in POC Start opening the cap.

INITIALIZING WAIT A MOMENT

E xxxx (Stop here)

5-46

5.12 System Information Setting Operation After Head Replacement

Perform the following operations after replacing the head to store system information.

(1) Perform the followings in system menu of engine maintenance mode on the operation panel. • SAVE SETTING:

Store NVRAM contents to the initial value setting area of the flash memory. • SAVE NVRAM:

Store NVRAM contents to the backup area of the flash memory.

Start

Do as follows on the operation panel in SYSTEM menu of the engine maintenance mode : • SAVE SETTING • SAVE NVRAM

＜Procedure＞

End


5-47

5.13 Heater Errors

Heater errors show an abnormality is occurred in the heater block. Ask the customer to restart the printer again first. If an error cannot be removed, ask the customer to contact our service centers. Get error generation time, error frequency, operation right before error, and operation temperature information from the customer.

Take the follow measures when an engine error is occurred.

(1) When the defective part is defined by the error, replace the specified module.

(2) When multiple defective parts are defined by the error, define the single defective part. Even when the heater error is occurred, the printer can be operated .

Error contents Error state display (Upper: LCD 1, Lower: LCD 2)

HCP board (heater panel) abnormality H01-xx System error

Connection abnormality between HCP board and RLY board

H02 Relay board error

Detected temperature abnormality of the front heater temperature detector thermistor (-10℃ or less, 70℃ or more)

H03F Heater temperature error

Detected temperature abnormality of the rear heater temperature detector thermistor (-10℃ or less, 70℃ or more)

H04R Heater temperature error

Detected temperature abnormality of the print heater temperature detector thermistor (-10℃ or less, 70℃ or more)

H05P Heater temperature error

The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed

H06F Heater time out error

The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes rear heater passed

H07R Heater time out error

The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes print heater passed

H08P Heater time out error

An error has occurred on the operation panel switch test in DIAG

H09 Operation panel switch error

An error has occurred on the AC relay test in DIAG H10 Zero cross erro

5-48

5.13.1 Heater error H01: System error

＜Description＞ This shows operational abnormality of HCP board. This shows an error has occurred at hardware test of HCP board such as write/read test to the built-in memory, check sum test of the built-in flash memory, or check sum test of the serial EEPROM.

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Replace HCP board.

5.13.2 Heater error H02: Relay board error

＜Description＞ This shows HCP board and RLY board are not connected together.

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) RLY board

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL

cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace RLY-B-CYL cable ASSY.

5.13.3 Heater error H03: F heater temperature error.

＜Description＞ Temperature read by F heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 °C or less, 70 °C or more)

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) Front paper guide (in which the front heater ASSY 64 is attacked)

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F thermistor with THRM cable

ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the front paper guide.


5-49

5.13.4 Heater error H04: R heater temperature error

＜Description＞ This shows temperature read from R heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 °C or less, 70 °C or more)

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) Rear paper guide (in which the rear heater ASSY (64) is attacked)

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to R thermistor with THRM cable

ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the rear paper guide.

5.13.5 Heater error H05: P heater temperature error

＜Description＞ This shows temperature read from P heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 °C or less, 70 °C or more)

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) Platen (in which the platen heater ASSY (64) is attacked)

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to P heater thermistor with THRM

cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the platen.

5.13.6 Heater error H06: F heater time out error

＜Description＞ This shows the front heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) Heater drive block ASSY (The tray in which a breaker, RLY board, AC relay,

and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) Front paper guide (in which the front heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F1 fuse on RLY board

5-50

＜Measures 1 to be taken＞ When "+" is not displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "F" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 °C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.

＜Measures 2 to be taken＞ When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater and F heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F thermistor with THRM cable

ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the front paper guide.

＜Measures 3 to be taken＞ When F paper guide does not become hot and panel display temperature does not raise even "+" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL

cable ASSY. (2) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F heater with the voltage

alternation switch ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Verify that F2 fuse (5ST10 made by BELFUSE) on RLY board is not broken. If

that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on F heater (over

current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN4 on RLY board.

CN4 CN4 at 120 V setting at 240 V setting 1 pin 3 pin 1 MΩ or more 220 to 30 Ω 1 pin 4 pin 55 to 75 Ω 1 MΩor more 2 pin 3 pin 55 to 75 Ω 1 MΩor more 2 pin 4 pin 1 MΩ or more 1 MΩor more

If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the F paper guide. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the front paper guide.

＜Measures 4 to be taken＞ When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "F" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel and the F paper guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive

ASSY is preset to the AC voltage used.


5-51

AC voltage Switch setting 100V to 120V 120 220V to 240V 240

(2) Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table in

<Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN4 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY.

If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the F paper guide.

5.13.7 Heater error H07: 7 R heater time out error

＜Description＞ This shows the rear heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.


and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) Rear paper guide (in which the rear heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F2 fuse on RLY board

＜Measures 1 to be taken＞ When "+" is not displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "R" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 °C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.

＜Measures 2 to be taken＞ When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater and R heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to R thermistor with THRM cable

ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the rear paper guide.

＜Measures 3 to be taken＞ When the rear paper guide become hot and the display temperature on the panel does not raise even though "+" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL

cable ASSY. (2) Verify that RLY board is connected correctly to R heater with the voltage


that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on R heater (over current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN5 on RLY board.

5-52


If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the rear paper guide.

＜Measures 4 to be taken＞ When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "R" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel and the F paper guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive


AC voltage Switch setting 100V to 120V 120 220V to 240V 240


<Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN5 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide.

5.13.8 Heater error H08: P heater time out error

＜Description＞ This shows the print heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board (2) RLY board (3) Platen (in which the platen heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F3 fuse on RLY board

＜Measures 1 to be taken＞ When "+" is not displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "P" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 °C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.

＜Measures 2 to be taken＞ When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater and R heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to P thermistor with THRM cable

ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board.


5-53

(3) Replace the platen.

＜Measures 3 to be taken＞ When the rear paper guide become hot and the display temperature on the panel does not raise even though "+" is displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL

cable ASSY. (2) Verify that RLY board is connected correctly to P heater with the voltage


that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on P heater (over current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN6 on RLY board.


If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the platen. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the platen.

＜Measures 4 to be taken＞ When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "P" is

displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel and the platen becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive


AC voltage Switch setting

100V to 120V 120

220V to 240V 240


<Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN6 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide.

5-54

5.13.9 Heater error H09: Operation panel switch error

＜Description＞ This error occurs if the specified switch is not pressed for 30 seconds or more when the diagnostics that verifies switch action is executed.

＜Defective module＞ (1) HCP board

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Though the switch is pressed, when it cannot be accepted, replace HCP board.

5.13.10 Heater error H10: Zero cross error

＜Description＞ This error occurs when the diagnostics for the AC relay is executed. The HCP board verifies that RLY board generates the zero cross signal when the AC relay is set to ON/OFF.


and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) RLY-CTL relay cable ASSY (4) RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY

＜Measures to be taken＞ (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to the relays on the heater block

ASSY with RLY-CTL relay cable ASSY and RLY-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL

cable ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Replace RLY board

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-1

Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)

This section describes troubleshooting of dryer 64.

6.1 Error Indication

Errors are not indicated on dryer 64. Failed modules cannot therefore be identified based on the error number. Measures to take for abnormal operations of the dryer are that if some operation that does not satisfy the standard performance or function of the dryer is found, the failed modules are presumed according to the type of abnormality, and the modules are replaced from the most highly suspected one.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-2

6.2 Error Types and Counteractions

When the dryer operates abnormally, the user is encouraged to restart the dryer. If the same error repeatedly occurs, then the user should contact the nearby service center. The maintenance personnel should obtain the time of occurrence, how often the error occurs, dryer settings (temperature, air flow) and ambient temperature at the time of error from the user.

(NOTE) 200VAC/230VAC is applied at the left side of the screen inside the electric box. Do not touch the terminals to prevent electric shocks when checking electricity in the process of narrowing down the cause of error. Do not touch the heat sink of the power supply. AC is also applied to the heat sink.

6.2.1 Power supply

<Error> Power LED (orange) does not light by turning on the circuit breaker switch.

<Failed modules> (1) Power supply unit (2) DRY board (3) Circuit breaker

<Measures> (1) Turn on the circuit breaker switch and check that 2xxVAC is supplied to the

terminal block of six terminals with a tester. If AC is not supplied, turn on the circuit breaker switch again, and check the harness connecting to the terminal block.

(2) Replace the circuit breaker switch. (3) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the

DRY board with a tester. If DC is not supplied, check the harness supplying AC to the power supply unit and the harness between the power supply unit and DRY board.

Measuring point

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)

6-3

(4) Replace the power supply unit. (5) Replace the DRY board.

6.2.2 Fan

(1) All fans do not turn.

<Error> Fans do not turn by turning on the power.

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) Power supply unit (3) Power supply unit of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (air flow control for the upper and

lower fans)

<Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the

DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to nine upper fans. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to four lower fans.

(3) Replace the DRY board. (4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (air flow control for the upper and lower fans).

Checking point

Checking point

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-4

(2) Upper fan(s) does not turn.

<Error> Upper fan(s) does not turn by turning on the power (1 to 9 fans).

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) FAN-ASSY (3) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans)


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to nine upper fans. (3) Check connection of the harness to the fan(s) that does not turn. The source of

failure, whether it is the drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting the signal line of the normal fan to the fun which does not turn. Replace FAN-ASSY when the fan is the source of failure.

(4) Voltage on TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) varies from 14V to 23V when the air flow control volume for the upper fans is turned. If the output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.

(5) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans).

Checking point

Measuring point


6-5

(3) Lower fan(s) does not turn.

<Error> Lower fan(s) does not turn by turning on the power (1 to 4 fans).

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) FAN-ASSY (3) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for lower fans)


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to four lower fans. (3) Check connection of the harness to the fan(s) that does not turn. The source of

failure, whether it is the drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting the signal line of the normal fan to the fun which does not turn. Replace FAN-ASSY when the fan is the source of failure.

(4) Voltage on TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) varies from 14V to 23V when the air flow control volume for the lower fans is turned. If the output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.

(5) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for lower fans).

Checking point

Measuring point

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-6

(4) Air flow does not change by adjusting the air flow control volume switch.

<Error> Air flow does not change by adjusting the air flow control volume switch.

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper/lower fans)


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the connectors of volume switches to the DRY board.

The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is connected to a relevant connector:

Temperature adjustment → CN10 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for upper fans → CN6 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for lower fans → CN7 of DRY board

(3) When the air flow control volume switch is turned, voltage on TP5 (silk

notation = PFAN1) or TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) varies from 14V to 23V. If output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.

(4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY connecting to CN6 if air flow of the upper fans is

abnormal. Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY connecting to CN7 if air flow of the lower fans is abnormal.

Checking point

Measuring point for upper fans

Measuring point for lower fans


6-7

(5) The EL box cooling fan does not turn.

<Error> The EL box cooling fan does not turn.

<Failed modules> (1) Cooling fan (for EL box) (2) DRY board


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN17) to the EL box

fan. (3) Replace the fan (for EL box). (4) Replace the DRY board.

6.2.3 Heater

(1) Warm air does not come out.

<Error> Warm air does not come out (power LED lights; fans are turning; and temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light).

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) SSR (3) Relay (4) Thermostat (5) Timer (6) Heater

Checking point

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-8


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check that 24V is supplied to SSR control terminals (between terminals (3) and

(4) aligned at the upper row) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection between CN9 of the DRY board and SSR. If connection is normal but 24V is not supplied, replace the DRY board.

(3) Check that 24V is supplied to relay control terminals (between terminals 5 and 6

aligned at the right row) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of the harness between CN9 of the DRY board and the timer, thermostat, and relay. If connection is normal but 24V is not supplied, replace the DRY board.

(4) Turn off the circuit breaker switch and measure resistance between SSR

terminal 2 and relay terminal 1. The normal resistance is 17.6Ω (±1Ω). If the measured value deviates from the normal value, check connection of the harness. If connection is normal, replace the heater.

Measuring point

Measuring point

Measuring point


6-9

(5) Failure of SSR can be considered if the SSR output is off (2XXV is present between SSR terminals 1 and 2) while the SSR control terminal is on (24V is present between control terminals). Replace SSR.

(6) Failure of the relay can be considered if the relay output is off (AC2XXV is present between relay terminals 1 and 4) while the relay control terminal is on (24V is present between control terminals). Replace the relay.

(7) Turn off the power and measure resistance between the thermostat terminals. Failure of the thermostat can be considered if the thermostat cools down but is off (open). In this case, replace the thermostat.

(8) Turn off the timer and measure resistance between pin 1 (a red cable is connected) and pin 9 (a red cable is connected) of the timer socket. If it is open, failure of the timer can be considered. Replace the timer.

(9) When error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY. If the connection is normal, replace the DRY board. If the error still occurs, replace THRM-CBL-ASSY.

VAC measuring point

VAC measuring point

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-10

(10) If error LED (PFAN1 POWER FAIL ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans). If the connection is normal, replace the DRY board. If the error still occurs, replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans).

(Note) Turn off the timer when checking operation.

(2) Warm air does not come out (temperature set LED (green) lights).

<Error> Warm air does not come out (power LED lights; fans are turning; and temperature set LED (green) lights).

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) THRM-CBL-ASSY


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (4) Check error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board. When the LED

lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY.


6-11

(5) Check short-circuit between THRM-CBL-ASSY and the cabinet. If the naked part of the terminal of the thermistor at the end of THRM-CBL-ASSY contacts with the metal sheet of the cabinet, adjust the thermistor position using tweezers to make clearance between the terminal and the cabinet.

(6) Replace the DRY board. (7) Replace THRM-CBL-ASSY.

(Note) Set the temperature to the highest possible value when checking the operation.

(3) Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light.

<Error> Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light.

<Failed module> (1) DRY board


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check the room temperature. If the room temperature is too low (below 20 °C),

the set temperature may not be reached. (3) Check that the dryer is not connected to 100VAC with a tester (measure at the

terminal block of 6 terminals. (4) Replace the DRY board.

Adhesive for securing the thermistor Metal sheet of the cabinet

Plastic case

Thermistor

Location to check

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-12

(4) Temperature does not change by turning the temperature control volume switch.

<Error> Temperature does not change by turning the temperature control volume switch.

<Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for temperature setting)


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the connectors of volume switches to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each

connector is connected to a relevant connector: Temperature adjustment → CN10 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for upper fans → CN6 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for lower fans → CN7 of DRY board (3) Replace the DRY board. (4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for temperature setting).

(5) The heater temperature is abnormally high.

<Error> The heater temperature is abnormally high.

<Failed modules> (1) Thermostat (2) DRY board (3) Relay (4) SSR (5) THRM-CBL-ASSY[ (6) Power supply unit

Measuring point


6-13

<Measures> This error occurs only when two or more parts fail at the same time. When thermistor circuit fails to retain the set temperature, the thermostat system detects abnormally high temperatures and the relay shuts off the heater current. The error therefore occurs by multiple failures of the part to retain the set temperature and the part to shut off the heater current at abnormally high temperatures. (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the

DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) If the fan(s) does not turn, take measures for the failure of the fan. (3) Replace the suspected modules (two or more parts at the same time).

6.2.4 Timer

(1) The heater does not turn off.

<Error> The heater does not turn off when the predetermined time on the timer is up.

<Failed module> (1) Timer


DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check the harness connecting the DRY board and the timer, thermostat and

relay. (3) Replace the timer.

(Note) Check that the user follows the usage instructions in the operation manual.

6-15

6.3 Appendix

6.3.1 IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table (1/3) Large

category Small

category Error code

Diagnosis/error description Error, possible cause and counteraction Replacement 1 Replacement 2 Replacement 3 Replacement 4 Replacement 5 Replacement 6 Replacement 7 Replacement 8 Replacement 9 Remarks

E0001 CPU internal RAM Failure of CPU IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0002 SRAM Failure of CPU, SRAM or BTC (FPGA) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0004 Flash ROM Sum check error in program area stored in flash ROM. Re-install the engine F/W. If this does not work, flash ROM or surrounding circuits may have malfunctioned. Replace the IPB1 board.

Engine F/W card (U000871503**)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0008 PIO Failure of the PIO device. IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0010 NVRAM Read/write check error in specific area, or memory sum check error. (Normally processed as engine error 11Ax.) For simultaneous occurrence of more than one error, including this error, take counteractions for other errors first, and when these errors are wiped out, restart the printer.

IC(NVRAM) (U00086991600)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0020 FPGA(IPB) Read/write error on the FPGA (ATG and RSM) register of the IPB1 board. Failure of the FPGA device or surrounding circuits. Replace the IPB1 board.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0040 FPGA(ICB) Read/write error on the FPGA (PTC and PDD) register of the ICB1 board. Failure of the FPGA device or surrounding circuits, or failure of interface circuits between boards. Before replacing parts, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and if this does not restore the printer, replace parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089234800)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0080 ASIC CONFIG(IPB) Unsuccessful load of program from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to FPGA on the IPB1 board, or program sum check error. Failure of the flash ROM, FPGA device, or surrounding circuits. Replace the IPB1 board.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0100 ASIC CONFIG(ICB) Unsuccessful load of program from flash ROM on the IPB1 board to FPGA on the ICB1 board, or program sum check error. Failure of the flash ROM or FPGA device, bad connection of carriage cables, failure of interface circuits between boards. Before replacing parts, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and if this does not restore the printer, replace necessary parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0200 DRAM Failure of DRAM or surrounding circuits. IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0400 SCSI register Read/write error on SCSI protocol controller of the WIM1 board. Failure of the WIM1 board or interface circuits between boards, or bad connection of the IPB1 and WIM1 boards. Pull out the boards and insert them again. If this does not restore the printer, replace the bad board(s).

WIM1 board (U00026299100)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

E0800 Power supply (+35, +24, +12V)

Power is not supplied to +36V, +24V, and/or +12VDC. Check output voltages, interlock switch state, connection of power supply unit cables, and fuse of the IPB1 board. Or the over-current protection circuit may have been activated. Check short-circuit of the harness and board, and turn off and on the insulator switch at the back of the printer.

Fuse (IPB) (U00036367700)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Power supply unit PSU-XW1X (U00078520400)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)


VDD2 board (U0002630131*)

Micro switch (U00057056500)

Interlock cable 64 (U00079085200)

This error is not caused by failure of micro switch (FW). Short-circuit is suspected for the parts in replacements 4, 5, and 6. For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top in this order.

POC

err

or (b

it er

ror)

E1000 SCSI board The WIM1 board is not connected properly. Improper connection of the IPB1 and WIM1 boards is the most common cause of this error. Pull out then insert the boards, and if this does not restore the printer, replace the bad board(s).

WIM1 board (U00026299100)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1110 GA_ATG block clear error

ATG (FPGA) band memory block is not erased in specific time (time-out error). Failure of the ATG device or surrounding circuits. Replace the board.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1111 GA_ATG DMA error Drawing data transfer error. Check connection between the unit and host computer. As malfunction, bad connection of the WIN1 board or failure of interface circuits between boards can be considered.

WIM1 board (U00026299100)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

SCSI cable assy. (LVD-6M) (U00027457700)

112x Vacuum fan malfunction

Vacuum fan does not turn, or turning cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts.

Suction fan assy. (U00046003400)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1140 Flash memory error Write error while NVRAM data was being written in flash ROM (write time-out, or erase time-out). Failure of flash ROM. Replace the IPB1 board.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1150 Home position detection error

Home position cannot be detected. Failure of the sensor or sensor circuit of the IPB1 board.

Photo sensor assy. (U00084544700)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1160 Wiping error Wiping motor does not revolve, or revolution cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts.

Motor (wiper) assy. (U00036684000)

Switch (wiper) assy. (U00036698500)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1170 Ambient temperature sensor error

Abnormal temperature was detected in ambient temperature thermistor. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

1180 Capping error Over-current of capping motor was detected. Apply grease on the capping unit gears and check over-current again before replacing parts.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Pump assy. (U00085987100)

Motor (cap) assy. (U00035952600)

119x VDD2 voltage error Head driving voltage is not output correctly. Check connection of the VDD2 board, and pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

VDD2 board (U0002630131*)


Fuse (IPB) (U00036367700)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

The fuse to replace is located at F1 on the IPB1 board. For bad carriage cables, the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top is the order of most suspect cause of error.

11Ax NVRAM error NVRAM error. The error may disappear by restarting the printer. If the error still continues to occur, check connection of the IPB1 board to the IC socket.

IC(NVRAM)(U0008-6991600)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

11B0 Update error Online F/W update error. Check connection between the unit and host computer. As malfunction, bad connection of the WIN1 board or failure of interface circuits between boards can be considered.

WIM1 board (U00026299100)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Engine F/W card (U000871503 **)

SCSI cable assy. (LVD-6M) (U00027457700)

11C0 Out-of-place cap Difference between two devices monitoring carriage positions. Check connection of the linear encoder connector, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and clean the T fence before replacing parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

Linear encoder assy. (U00046006700)

T fence 64 (U00086122100)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top in this order.

11D0 Malfunction of cooling fan

The head temperature does not decrease to specified level even when the cooling fan is operating. Check connection of the connector before replacing parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

Cooling fan (U00084528000)

Head (U00081350800)

Serv

ice

call

erro

r

Engi

ne e

rror

11E0 Long-term storage error

Power off state of the printer has continued for more than a month (31 days). Turn on the power while pressing [SHIFT] and [CANCEL] at the same time. Clean the printer and replace necessary parts in maintenance mode.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-16

IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table (2/3) Large

category Small

category Error code

Diagnosis/error description Error, possible cause and counteraction Replacement 1 Replacement 2 Replacement 3 Replacement 4 Replacement 5 Replacement 6 Replacement 7 Replacement 8 Replacement 9 Remarks

120x Abnormal head driver IC temperature

Temperature of the head driving IC is abnormally high or low. Pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts.

ICB1 board (U000810887**)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 3rd, 2nd and 4th from the top in this order.

121x Abnormal head temperature

Temperature of the head is abnormally high or low. Pull out then insert the head and carriage cables before replacing parts.

Head cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089679300)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

Head (U00081350800)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)


1220 Edge sensor error Edge sensor calibration error. Check connection of cables, and obstacles or dirt in calibration area (platen (no reflection tape)) from end of cap to paper before replacing parts.

Edge sensor assy. (U00046008000)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)


123x Sub tank sensor (full/half) error

Logical inconsistency of combined state of sub tank sensors. Check connection of the connector and movement of the detection lever of sensors before replacing parts.

Half sensor assy. (U00084545800)

Full sensor assy. (U00046985200)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

124x Ink supply sensor error

Ink supply motor does not revolve, or revolution cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness, short-circuit of terminals and wirings before replacing parts.

Motor assy. (SP pump) (U00084118400)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

125x Sub tank supply error Sub tank sensor does not go down under “half” no matter how much ink is consumed. Check connection of the connector and movement of the detection lever of sensors before replacing parts.

Half sensor assy. (U00084545800)

Full sensor assy. (U00046985200)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

126x Bad FFC connection Bad connection of carriage cables. Pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts.


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)

Y drive motor 64 assy. (U00085456100)

SUS belt 64 (U00086135500)

Synch belt (U00045985400)

Linear encoder assy. (U00046006700)

T fence 64 (U00086122100)


DC motor cable assy. (64) (U00079079500)

Carriage drive system

Engi

ne e

rror

1700 Servo error Error occurs when the servo task reports error (e.g. over-current of motor), encoder signals usually changing by driving the X or Y motor do not change, or there is no interrupt from the PWM gate array. Increase in load to the motor due to paper jam, idling due to malfunction of the transmission system, or bad connection of connector may be the cause. Check the status before replacing parts.

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Feed motor assy. (U00051862400)

Reduction belt (U00046001200)

Motor encoder cable assy. (64) (U00079088500)

DC motor cable assy. (64) (U00079079500)

Feed drive system

F_es:0001 Op code exception

F_es:0002 Wrong slot exception

F_es:0003 Address exception

F_es:0004 DMA error

Serv

ice

call

erro

r

Syst

em e

rror

F_es:0005 NMI occurrence (Watch Dog error)

Unrecoverable system exception interrupt was caused in the engine unit. Wait and see the status while turning the power off and on. If this error frequently occurs, ask the user the status in which the error occurs, and replace the IPB1 board or engine F/W if necessary.

Engine F/W card (U000871503 **)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

6-17

IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table (3/3) Large

category Small category Error code Diagnosis/error description Possible cause and counteraction Replacement 1 Replacement 2 Replacement 3 Replacement 4 Remarks

REPLACE INK. No ink Incomplete setting of cartridge, or dirty terminal of cartridge. If the cartridge is dirty, clean and set it again. If this does not restore the printer, replace necessary parts. Check connection of connectors before replacement.

INK2 board (U000780783**)

Ink cartridge R cable 64 (U00079086300)

Ink cartridge L cable 100 (U00079087400)

IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

SET INK. Ink cartridge is not set Ink cartridge

CHECK INK. Ink cartridge error

Waste ink SET INK BOTTLE. Waste ink bottle is not set Incomplete setting of waste ink bottle notch, or failure of waste ink bottle detection switch. Micro switch 2

(U00046054100) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Paper jam

Paper jam was detected Paper jam detection error. Take counteractions according to the message. If error detection appears while paper jam does not occur, clean the paper sensor, check connection, and see if the error indication disappears. When the sensor malfunctions, replace the sensor. If the error message still appear, take counteractions as indicated in “Engine error 1700”.

Paper sensor assy. (U00085453700)

Paper error Paper skew was detected Error indicating paper skew.

Incorrect setting of paper, dirty platen, dirty edge sensor or malfunction of sensor may be the cause. Edge sensor assy. (U00046008000)

ICB1 board (U000810887**)


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Operator call error

Other Sensor errors If sensor errors other than the above error continue to occur, replace the failed sensor or IPB1 board.

System error H01-xx Malfunction of HCP board

(heater panel) Error generated as a result of the microcomputer in the HCP board carrying out memory read/write or check sum tests. Failure of IC on the HCP board or incorrect signal wiring may be the cause.

Heater panel (U00085906100)

Relay board error H02 Bad connection of HCP and RLY

boards Error is generated when it is recognized that the HCP and RLY boards are not connected with harness. Check connection of the harness between CN3 of heater panel and CN3 of RLY board before replacing parts.


RLY board (U00078671200)

H03 Abnormal front heater temperature Abnormal temperature detected by the front heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10°C or over 70°C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the front heater thermistor before replacing parts.


Paper guide F (64) assy. (U00085907200)

H04 Abnormal rear heater temperature Abnormal temperature detected by the rear heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10°C or over 70°C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the rear heater thermistor before replacing parts.


Paper guide F (64) assy. (U00085908300)

Heater temperature error

H05 Abnormal print heater temperature Abnormal temperature detected by the print heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10°C or over 70°C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the print heater thermistor before replacing parts.


Platen (64) assy. (U00085909400)

H06 Rise of front heater temperature is too slow

Front heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN4 of the RLY board and connector of the font heater are connected via harness.


Fuse (heater) (U00079512600)

RLY board (U00078671200)

Paper guide F (64) assy.(U00085907200)

Fuse to replace is located at F1 of the RLY board.

H07 Rise of rear heater temperature is too slow

Rear heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN5 of the RLY board and connector of the rear heater are connected via harness.


Fuse (heater) (U00079512600)

RLY board (U00078671200)

Paper guide F (64) assy.(U000S5908300)


Heater time-out

H08 Rise of print heater temperature is too slow

Print heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN6 of the RLY board and connector of the print heater are connected via harness.


Fuse (heater) (U00079512600)

RLY board (U00078671200)

Platen (64) assy. (U00085909400)


Op panel switch error

H09 Heater panel switch test error Error in DIAG heater control panel switch tests. Heater panel (U00085906100)

Zero cross error H10 AC relay test error Error in DIAG AC relay tests. Check the following before replacing parts:

(1) Connection of CN2 of the heater panel and relay. (2) Connection of CN3 of the heater panel and CN3 of the RLY board.


RLY board (U00078671200)

Error code is not displayed. Heater panel error 5V power supply on the heater panel does not turn on, or failure of heater panel. Check connection of CN1 of the heater panel and CN1 of the power supply unit before replacing parts.


TURN ON HEATER POWER SIWTCH.

AC input detection error Zero cross signals are not sent from the RLY board. Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Connection of CN2 of the heater panel and relay. (2) Connection of CN3 of the heater panel and CN3 of the RLY board.


RLY board (U00078671200)

INITIALIZING... Bad connection of HCP and IPB1 boards

Connection to the IPB1 board cannot be recognized. Check connection of harness between CN5 of the heater operation panel and CN16 of the IPB1 board before replacing parts.


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

ENG-INF cable assy. (U0007882600)

Heater error

Other

POWER SAVE MODE 12V power supply failure 12V power supply does not turn on. Check connection of CN1 of the heater panel and CN1 of the power supply unit before replacing parts.


IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Power supply unit PSU-XW1X (U00078520400)

Other Other Error code is not displayed. CPU does not operate at all. Power does not turn on. Operation panel malfunctions. Check the power supply unit and related parts, and

connection state of harness of the operation panel before replacing parts. IPB1 board (U000809313 **)

Operation panel SII (U00045843600)

Panel cable 64 (U00079081700)

Power supply unit PSU-XWIX (U00078520400)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

6-18

6.3.2 Dryer unit 64 Failure Description - Replacement Association Table Category Failure description Major cause Counteraction Replacement 1 Replacement 2 Replacement 3 Replacement 4 Replacement 5 Replacement 6 Remarks

Power supply

Power LED (orange) does not light after power on.

· The failure occurs when 24VDC is not supplied to the DRY board.

Failure of power supply Failure of DRY board Failure of circuit breaker

· Check supply of 2XXV AC to terminal block of 6 terminals with a tester with the breaker switch set to ON. If 2XXV AC is not supplied, turn on the breaker switch again. Check connection of harness to the terminal block.

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. If 24V DC is not supplied, check the harness for AC line to power supply unit and the harness between the power supply and DRY board.

· Replace the parts listed at the right side.

Power supply unit (U00086797100)

DRY board (U000863425**)

Circuit breaker (U00086794700)

· Power LED may light even when DC24V is not output correctly. (Note 1) (Note 2)

All fans do not turn. (Power LED lights.)

Failure of DRY board · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. · Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)


VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper/lower fans)

More than one fan in upper row does not turn.

Failure of DRY board · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)

Fan assy. (U00086952300)


VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper fans)

· The source of failure, drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting signals which are sent to the operating fan to the fun which does not operate.

· When the air flow adjusting volume for upper fans is turned, the TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V.

One of fans in upper row does not turn.

Failure of fan · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness to the connector of fans which do not turn. · Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

Fan assy. (U00086952300)

DRY board (U000863425**)





More than one fan in lower row does not turn.

Failure of DRY board · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)

Fan assy. (U00086952300)


VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of lower fans)


· When the air flow adjusting volume for lower fans is turned, the TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V.

One of fans in lower row does not turn.

Failure of fan · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness to the connector of fans which do not turn. · Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

Fan assy. (U00086952300)

DRY board (U000863425**)


VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of lower fans)



Air flow does not change by turning the knob.

Failure of volume switch Failure of DRY board

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the connector of volume switch to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is

connected to a relevant connector: Temperature adjustment → CN10 of DRY board Upper fan air flow adjustment → CN6 of DRY board Lower fan air flow adjustment → CN7 of DRY board · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)

VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000)


VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper/lower fans)



Fan

Cooling fan in electric box does not turn.

Failure of EB cooling fan Failure of DRY board

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN17) to the EB cooling fan. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

FAN (EL-BOX) (U00086953400)

DRY board (U000863425**)


(Note 5)

(1) SSR does not turn on. Failure of DRY board

or SSR

· SSR is not ON in the state in which 2XXV AC is detected between SSR terminals 1 and 2 while the heater is ON.

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check supply of 24V to SSR control terminals (between terminals 3 and 4 aligned at upper side)

with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of CN9 of the DRY board and SSR. · When error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of

THRM-CBL-ASSY. If error does not disappear, replace THRM-CBL ASSY or DRY board. · Check the error LEDs on the DRY board. If PFAN1 POWER FAIL ERROR lights, check

connection of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for air flow adjustment of upper fans). If error does not disappear, replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for air flow adjustment of upper fans)

or DRY board. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)

SSR (U00086476000)



THRM-CBL-ASSY (U00086831800)

TEMP UNDER ERROR LED will light at ambient temperature under -10°C, but this is not failure. (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 4)

(2) Relay does not turn on. · Relay is not ON in the state in which 2XXV AC is detected between relay terminals 1 and 4 while the heater is ON.

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check supply of 24V to relay control terminals (between terminals 5 and 6 aligned at right side)

with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of the harness between CN13 of the DRY board and the

timer, thermostat, and relay. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)

Relay (U00086795800)

Thermostat (U00086846500)

Timer (U00086799300)


· Turn off the timer switch during operation check. (Note 1) (Note 2)

Warm air does not come out. (Temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light; power LED lights; and fan is turning.)

(3) Heater error · Measure resistance between SSR terminal 2 and relay terminal 1 with the breaker switch OFF. The value for normal resistance is 17.6Ω (±1Ω). If the measured value deviates from the normal

value, check connection of the harness. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

FIN-HEATER (U00086927500)

Warm air does not come out. (Temperature set indicator LED (green) lights; power LED lights; and fan is turning.)

Failure of thermistor/DRY board

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check error LED (TEMP OVER ERROR) on the DRY board. If the LED lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)



· Set the temperature at highest permissible level. (Note 4)

Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) continues to extinguish. (Power LED lights; and fan is turning.)

Failure of thermistor/DRY board, or incorrect supply voltage

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Replace the parts listed at the right side.

DRY board (U000863425**)


· Check the room temperature. If it is too low, the set temperature may not be reached (it should be over 20°C).

· Measure power supply with a tester to check that the printer is not connected to 100V AC (measure at the terminal block of 6 terminals).

(Note 1) (Note 2)

Temperature does not change by turning the knob. (Power LED lights; and fan is turning.)

Failure of volume switch/ DRY board

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check connector of the volume switch is correctly connected to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is

connected to a relevant connector. Temperature adjustment → CN10 of DRY board Upper fan air flow adjustment→ CN6 of DRY board Lower fan air flow adjustment → CN7 of DRY board · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

VOLSW-CBL-ASSY(U00086832000) (for setting temperature)

DRY board (U000863425**)


Heater

Heater temperature is abnormally high.

SSR, relay, DRY board, thermostat

· Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Follow the instructions for fans if the fans do not turn. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.(Replace two or more parts at the same time)

Thermostat (U00086846500)

DRY board (U000863425**)

Relay (U00086795800)

SSR (U00086476000)



This failure occurs only when two or more parts fail at the same time. Since fail-safe design is used for the printer, failure of only one part does not result in this state. (Note 4)

Timer Heater does not turn off after timer set time.

Failure of timer · Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester.· Check the harness connecting timer, thermostat, relay and DRY board. · Replace the parts listed at the right side.

Timer (U00086799300)


(Note 1) AC is applied at the left side of the screen in the electric box. Do not touch the terminal to prevent electric shock. (Note 2) AC is applied to the heat sink of the power supply. Do not touch the heat sink to prevent electric shock. (Note 3) The parts to replace are listed from the order of the highest possibility of failure. (Note 4) Binding bands and specified adhesive (high heat resistance silicon gasket 1209 Three Bond) are required for replacing THRM-CBL-ASSY. (Note 5) Binding bands are required for replacing the fan (EL-BOX).

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-1

Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

This section describes disassembly and reassembly procedures for replacing printer components.

7.1 Reading This Section

7.1.1 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure

The following rules must be obeyed for parts replacement (disassembly/reassembly) procedures.

<Removal>: Indicates a disassembly procedure. Note that some detailed procedures are shown in illustrations. The numbers in parentheses show the number of screws or

connectors to be removed.

<Installation>: Indicates a reassembly procedure. Only notes are described because components are installed in the reverse order of removal.

♦ Observe the installed components before starting disassembly. This can facilitate reassembly after parts replacement.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-2

7.2 Names of Parts

7.2.1 Names of parts and layout

The names of maintenance parts of this printer are shown in Table 7-1 to 7-14. Refer to the tables for disassembling and reassembling procedures. See Figures 7-1 and 7-2 for the covers and guides.

(1) Y rail cover (14) Paper guide (Rear)

(2) Top cover (Left) (15) Front cover (Center)

(3) Top cover (Right) (16) Front cover (Right)

(4) Side cover (Left) (17) Front cover (Left)

(5) Side cover (Right) (18) Side cover 2 (Left)

(6) Sub ink tank cover (Left) (19) Side cover 2 (Right)

(7) Sub ink tank cover (Right) (20) Ink holder cover (Front left)

(8) Ink cassette cover (Left) (21) Ink holder cover (Front right)

(9) Ink cassette cover (Right) (22) Ink holder side cover (Left)

(10) Paper guide (Front) (23) Ink holder side cover (Right)

(11) Supply pump cover (Left) (24) Cap cover (Upper)

(12) Supply pump cover (Right) (25) Wiper cover (Lower)

(13) Rear acrylic cover (26) Cap cover (Lower)

(27) Wipe cover (Lower)

Figure 7-1 Cover Names and Layout

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(8) (20)

(17) (10) (15) (16)

(9)

(7)

(19) (12)

(5)

(5) (3)

(13) (1) (2)

(4)

(18)

(14)

(23)(21)

(22)

(15)

(24) (25)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

7-3

■ Dryer 64

Figure 7-2 Cover names and layout (Dryer 64)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-4

■ Cover

Table 7-1 Maintenance part names (Cover)

Number Part name Part code Refer to

1 MICRO SWITCH U00057056500 7.3.1.1

2 MICRO SWITCH (F/W) U00057057600 7.3.1.2

3 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY U00084544700 7.3.1.4

4 PANEL ASSY SII U00045843600 7.3.1.5

5 PANEL CABLE 64 U00079081700

6 KNOB U00085512300

7 INTER LOCK CABLE 64 U00079085200 7.3.1.3

8 HEATER PANEL U00085906100 7.3.1.6

9 HEATER PANEL CABLE U00078882600

10 PAPER GUIDE (64) ASSY U00085907200

11 Y RAIL COVER U00091247500

12 SUBTANK COVER (L) U00091248600

13 SUBTANK COVER (R) U00091249700

14 REAR ACRYLIC COVER U00091250800

15 CAP COVER (UPPER) U00091251000

16 CAP COVER (LOWER) U00091253200

17 WIP COVER (UPPER) U00091252100

18 WIP COVER (LOWER) U00091254300

19 TOP COVER U00084245500

20 SIDE COVER U00087258300

21 CP64S LABEL U00084745100

■ Foot assembly

Table 7-2 Maintenance parts names (Foot assembly)


1 CASTER U00043889500

2 MICRO SWITCH 2 U00046054100

3 WASTE INK TANK CABLE ASSY(64) U00079080600

4 TUBE(WASTE)ASSY U00093966600

● Regular replacement part (once a year)


7-5

■ Y drive unit

Table 7-3 Maintenance parts names (Y drive unit)


1 Y MOTOR 64 ASSY U00085456100 7.3.2.2

2 SYNCHRONOUS BELT U00045985400 7.3.2.3

3 DOUBLE PULLEY ASSY U00085535800 7.3.2.3

4 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY U00084544700 7.3.2.1

5 T FENCE 64 U00086122100 7.3.2.9

6 STEEL BELT 64 U00085483100 7.3.2.4

7 DRIVEN PULLEY 64 ASSY U00087361700 7.3.2.5

8 PRESSURE BRACKET UNIT 64 U00089453200 7.3.2.6

9 DC MOTOR CABLE ASSY (64) U00079079500

10 CARRIAGE CABLE 64 (FOR MAINTENANCE) U00089234800 7.3.2.9

11 SHEET (CARRIAGE CABLE 64) U00089236100

12 SCREW CAP U00046070800

13 PRESSURE SPRING 64C U00086149100 (7.3.2.7)

14 PRESSURE SPRING 64A U00085150200 (7.3.2.7)

15 PRESSURE ROLLER 64 U00087236800 7.3.2.7

16 CLIP (35) U00090289100

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-6

■ X drive unit

Table 7-4 Maintenance parts names (X drive unit)


1 SPEED REDUCTION BELT U00085538200 7.3.3.1

2 PAPER SENSOR ASSY U00085453700 7.3.3.3 (Front) 7.3.3.4 (Rear)

3 VACUUM FAN ASSY U00085452600 7.3.3.2

4 PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY U00085457200 7.3.3.1

5 MOTOR ENCODER CABLE ASSY (64) U00079088500

6 PLATEN (64) ASSY U00085909400

7 PAPER GUIDER (64) ASSY U00085908300

8 X PULLY U00085631500 （7.3.3.1）

9 MEDIA EDGE GUARD U00087029800

■ Power unit

Table 7-5 Maintenance parts names (Power unit)


1 POWER SUPPLY U00078520400 7.3.4.2

2 PCB-ASSY-IPB1 U000809313** 7.3.4.3

3 PCB-ASSY-WIM1 U000262991** 7.3.4.3

4 PCB-ASSY-VDD2 U0002630131* 7.3.4.3

5 FUSE (IPB) U00036367700 -

6 FUSE (WIMl) 37200-0302

7 IC (NVRAM) U00086991600

8 PCB-ASSY-RLY U00078671200 7.3.4.4

9 FUSE (HEATER) U00079512600


7-7

■ Carriage head unit

Table 7-6 Maintenance parts names (Carriage head unit)


1 EDGE SENSOR ASSY U00085451500 7.3.5.2

2 PCB-ASSY-ICB1 U000810887** 7.3.5.3

3 HEAD CABLE 64 (for maintenance) U00083005700 7.3.5.1

4 PCB-ASSY-CNB1H U000820991**

5 COMPRESSION SPRING U00085545000

6 PRESSURE BOARD U00085557300

7 HEAD U00081350800 7.3.5.4

8 LINEAR ENCODER ASSY U00085454800 7.3.5.5

9 AIR DUMPER ASSY U00084271600

10 COOLING FAN U00084528000 7.3.5.4

■Wiping unit

Table 7-7 Maintenance parts names (Wiping unit)


1 WIPING UNIT (64) U00084271400 7.3.6.1

2 CLEANER (WIPER 64) UNIT U00087048000 7.3.6.2 ● Regular

replacement part (once a year)

3 BLADE (WIPER RUBBER 64) U00084376100 7.3.6.3 ● Regular


4 MOTOR (WIPER) ASSY U00036684000 7.3.6.4

5 SENSOR (WIPER HOME) ASSY U00094192700

6 SWITCH (WIPER 64) ASSY U00036698500 7.3.6.5

7 BELT (WIPER) U00036663600 7.3.6.6 ● Regular


8 ROLLER (CLEANER Sa) UNIT U00075945300

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-8

■ Capping unit

Table 7-8 Maintenance parts names (Capping unit)


1 CAPPING UNIT (64) U00084174600 7.3.7.1

2 DC MOTOR (CAP) ASSY U00035952600 7.3.7.2

3 BELT U00036259700 7.3.7.3

4 TORQUE LIMITER U00037102400 7.3.7.7

5 PUMP-ASSY U00085987100 7.3.7.8 ● Regular


6 JOINT (CAP) U00066733700 7.3.7.9

7 CAP-ASSY U00084179200 7.3.7.5 ● Regular


8 SOLENOID U00085230000 7.3.7.4

9 ORlFICE U00078672300

■ Ink cartridge unit

Table 7-9 Maintenance parts names (Ink cartridge unit)


1 lNK BOX L 64 ASSY U00084184700 7.3.8.1

2 INK BOX R 64 ASSY U00084201600 7.3.8.1

3 PCB-ASSY-INK 2 U00078078300 7.3.8.2

4 FILTER ASSY (SA) ∪00076402100 7.3.8.1

5 INK CARTRIDGE R CABLE 64 U00079086300 7.3.8.1

6 INK CARTRIDGE L CABLE 64 U00079087400 7.3.8.1

7 PUMP TUBE ASSY U00084117300 ● Regular


8 MOTOR ASSY (SP PUMP) U00087060300 7.3.8.1

9 lNK ABSORPTlON SHEET U00084759600

10 PUMP UNIT U00084117300

11 PUMP COVER (R) U00091278000

12 PUMP COVER (L) U00084199400

13 INK COVER (R) U00089941400

14 INK COVER (L) U00089940300

15 INK HOLDER COVER (FRONT) U00084200500

16 INK HOLDER COVER (SIDE) U00084193700


7-9

■ Sub tank unit

Table 7-10 Maintenance parts names (Sub tank unit)


1 SUB TANK UNIT U00084116200 7.3.9.1

2 lNK PAD U00083965400 7.3.9.1

3 FULL SENSOR ASSY U00087237000 7.3.9.1

4 HALF SENSOR ASSY U00084545800 7.3.9.1

■ Winder unit

Table 7-11 Maintenance parts names (Winder unit)


1 ROLL UP SWITCH ASSY U00079150400

2 LIMIT GEAR U00046076500

3 MINl KEEPER U00085462700

4 LIMlT SPRING U00046032600

5 REFLECTlON PLATE 64 ASSY U00085991500

6 MICRO PHOTO SENSOR U00046034800

7 GEARED MOTOR ASSY U00051863500

8 MINI KEEPER U00084336600

9 KNOB U00046069700

10 MEDIA SENSOR U00085222100

11 TENSION ROLLER A U00082330700

12 TENSION ROLLER B U00082331800

13 TENSION ROLLER C U00082332000

14 TENSION ROLLER D U00084548200

15 FLANGE SPACER (DRIVE SIDE) U00090021300

■ Cables

Table 7-12 Maintenance parts names (cables)


1 SCSl CABLE ASSY (LVD-6H) U00027457700

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-10

■ Jigs

Table 7-13 Maintenance parts names (Jigs)


1 ADJUSTER (HIGHT) KIT U00087407800

2 HEAD ADJUST JIG U00084551500

3 CAP HEIGHT GAUGE U00084713500

4 CARRIER BAR U00087070400

5 ENGINE F/W CARD -

6 HEATER F/W CARD U000898762**

■ Dryer 64

Table 7-14 Maintenance parts (Dryer 64)


1 BREAKER U00086794700 7.3.12.1

2 RELAY U00086795800 7.3.12.2

3 SSR U00086746000 7.3.12.3

4 POWER SUPPLY UNIT U00086797100 7.3.12.4

5 TIMER U00086799300 7.3.12.5

6 THERMOSTAT U00086846500 7.3.12.6

7 THRM-CBL-ASSY U00086831800 7.3.12.7

8 VOLSW-CBL-ASSY U00086832000 7.3.12.8

9 FAN-ASSY U00086952300 7.3.12.9

10 FAN (EL-BOX) U00086953400 7.3.12.10

11 PCB-ASSY-DRY U00089342501 7.3.12.11

12 GUARD U00088474400 7.3.12.12

13 lNSULATOR (TERMINAL CAP) U00087251500 7.3.12.13


7-11

7.3 Maintenance Parts Disassembly and Reassembly

Reassembly procedures are not described in most cases. Reassemble parts in the reverse order of disassembly. If the replacement procedure is the same, a section to be referred to is shown.

For information on adjustment procedures, see Section 8, Adjustment.

♦ Before starting maintenance, turn the power switch OFF and remove the power cable from the outlet.

CAUTION

♦ If ink sticks to an electrical part and an electrically conductive foreign matter attaches to the ink, it may cause fire, though ink itself is not conductive. If ink sticks to electrical or other components, wipe it off with cleaning paper.

WARNING

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-12

Screws and E rings used for the printer Common parts (screws, etc.) used for disassembly and replacement are shown below. Number: CBK 3 x 6 S N Shape Screw diameter Material Screw length Surface treatment

Drawing Name Abbreviation Use

Cross recessed binding screw (silver) CBK4x8SZ CBK4x6SA CBK5x8SZ

Fix covers.

Cross recessed pan cup machine screw (gold)

CCUK4x8SZ CCUK4x5SZ CCUK3x20SZ

Fix most components, such as drive unit components, and fan.

Cross recessed machine screw with washer (gold)

CUKSK3x6SZ Fix boards.

Cross recessed pan-head screw (gold) CUK4x8SZ CUK2x8SZ

Fix motors and sensors.

Hexagon socket bolt (black paint) AB3x20SZ

Hexagon socket bolt (gold) AB4x8SB

E ring ER10UO

The abbreviation and use columns show typical screws. For information on types of screws used for each part, see the replacement procedures in the following sections.

Screws and E rings are based on ISO standard (metric). Use metric tools.


7-13

7.3.1 Covers and foot assembly

7.3.1.1 Ink cartridge cover (right) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front right))

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (19) side cover 2 (Right), (21) ink holder cover (Front right), and (23) ink holder side cover (Right).

2. Remove the connector.

3. Remove the ink cassette cover (right) switch assembly attached to ink cassette cover (Right).

7.3.1.2 Ink cartridge cover (left) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front left))

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), and (22) ink holder side cover (Left).


3. Remove the cassette cover (right) switch assembly attached to ink cassette cover.

Ink cassette cover

Switch

Ink cassette cover

Switch

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-14

7.3.1.3 Interlock microswitch

<Removal>

1. Remove (5) side cover (Right), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), (21) ink holder cover (Front right), (11) supply pump cover (Left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), and (27) wipe cover (Lower).

2. Remove two screws securing the interlock microswitch, and remove interlock cable 64.

Green: 36V interlock switch Red: F/W interlock switch

3. Remove the interlock cable 64 switch.

Microswitch

♦ A plate and an interlock button aremounted behind the microswitch. The plate may fall off when thescrews securing the microswitchare removed. Keep the plate inplace.

NOTE


7-15

7.3.1.4 Photo sensor assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the (10) paper guide (Front).


3. Lower the lever and remove the photo sensor assembly.

7.3.1.5 Operation panel assembly, panel cable

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (19) side cover 2 (Right), (16) front cover (Right), and (7) sub tank cover (Right).

2. Remove all cables and connectors.

3. Remove the operation panel assembly.

Remove Operation panel assembly

Loosen (Fixed with ground wire)

Remove

Loosen

Photo sensor assembly

♦ Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting thepaper guide.

♦ When mounting (10) paper guide (Front), check whether latches around the grit roller are in the specified positions.

♦ Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions(two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can bemounted at the same height to avoid skew.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-16

7.3.1.6 Heater panel assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (6) sub ink tank cover (Left).

2. Remove all cables.

3. Remove the heater panel assembly.

7.3.1.7 Waste ink bottle sensor

<Removal>

1. Loosen the notch securing the waste ink bottle, and remove the waste ink bottle.

Heater panel assembly

Notch

♦ Place waste cloth under the waste ink bottle to remove. The ink remaining in the bottle may spill out.

NOTE


7-17

2. Remove two screws from the socket of the waste ink bottle.

3. Turn the socket of the waste ink bottle to the opposite side, remove two screws securing the waste ink bottle sensor, and cut Insulock’ tie.


7.3.1.8 Supply pump end sensor

<Removal>

1. Remove the supply pump cover (Right).

2. Remove a screw.


Screws

Insulock’ tie

Screws

Screws

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-18

7.3.2 Y drive unit

7.3.2.1 Photo sensor assembly

<Removal>

1. Move the Carriage to the wipe side.

2. Remove the (5) side cover (Right).

3. Remove the (3) top cover (Right).


5. Remove the photo sensor assembly.

7.3.2.2 Carriage motor assembly, Bearing (DE-46562)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), and (3) top cover (Right).


3. Remove the screw holding the motor bracket and loosen the synchronizing belt tension.

4. Remove the Carriage motor assembly.

5. Replace the bearing (DE-46562).

Photo sensor assembly

♦ After replacing the photo sensor, check the capping position and adjust it according to Section 8.9, Capping Position Adjustment.

NOTE

Synchronizing beltMounting of "Carriage motor assembly"

Carriage motor assembly

Motor bracket

Control items for replacement

1. Synchronizing belt tension: 41N±2N（4.18 kgf±0.2 kgf）

2. Synchronizing belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L

⇒ See Section 8 Adjustment.

NOTE

Bearing (DE-46562)

Motor

Hit the opposite side of the screw on the drive pully to the bearing and secure two screws. (screw torque: 14 kg fcm, 137.34 N-cm)


7-19

7.3.2.3 Two-step pulley assembly, synchronizing belt

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), and (3) top cover (Right).

2. Loosen the screw holding the driven pulley assembly (7.3.2.5) and loosen the steel belt tension.

3. Remove the screw (Carriage unit) holding the steel belt and loosen the steel belt. (see 7.3.2.4)

4. Loosen the screw holding the motor bracket and loosen the synchronizing belt tension.

5. Remove the two-step pulley assembly.

6. Remove the Carriage motor assembly (see Section 7.3.2.2) and remove the synchronizing belt.

Control items for replacement 1. Synchronizing belt tension: 41 N ± 2 N (4.18 kgf±0.2 kgf) 2. Synchronizing belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L 3. Steel belt tension : 1.5N±0.1N (0.15 kgf±0.01 kgf) => Section 8, Adjustment

Synchronizing belt

Steel belt

Two-step pulley assembly

♦ Beware of the following to avoid damages to the steel belt:

• Dusts on the pulley. Wipe the pulley if it is dirty.

• Direct contact of the Y-rail hole and steel belt. Apply waste cloth on the steel belt.

• Do not touch the steel part directly.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-20

7.3.2.4 Steel belt (64)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (4) side cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (12) ink cassette cover (rear right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left).

2. Loosen the two screws holding the driven pulley (see Section 7.3.2.5.) and loosen the steel belt (64) tension.

3. Remove the screws holding the steel belt (64) at the right and left sides of the Carriage assembly and remove the steel belt (64) through the hole in the Y rail.

Steel belt (64) Screw holding the steel belt (64) (left)

♦ Install the steel belt in the reverse order of removal. When the steel belt (64) is inserted into the hole in the Y rail, its end should be taped to a metal scale to facilitate the work.

Steel belt (64) tension: 1.5N±0.1N (0.15 kgf±0.01 kgf) => Section 8, Adjustment





NOTE


7-21

7.3.2.5 Driven pulley assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left).

2. Loosen the two screws holding the driven pulley assembly and loosen the steel belt tension.

3. Remove the driven pulley assembly.

Screw

Driven pulley assembly

Screw

Control items for replacement 1. Steel belt (64) tension : 1.5N±0.1N (0.15 kgf±0.01 kgf)

=> Section 8, Adjustment





NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-22

7.3.2.6 Pressure bracket assembly

<Removal>


2. Remove the eight covers (top covers, side covers, and ink cassette covers (rear/front).

3. Remove paper guide (Front). (See Section 7.3.10.1.) 4. Remove the acrylic cover and Y rail cover. (Remove the eight screws

and the four screws at the lower front and remove the operation panel (two screws).)

5. Remove the media feed motor. (See Section 7.3.3.1.)

6. To remove the cam shaft, lift the lever and remove the E ring of the lever link mechanism. (Use care not to miss the E ring.)

7. Move the cam shaft toward the media feed motor.

8. Remove the pressure bracket assembly.

E ring

Lever link mechanism

Pressure Bracket assembly

Remove the screws by inserting a screwdriver in the round holes on the catarpillar plate.

Round holes on the catarpillar plate


7-23

7.3.2.7 Pressure roller

<Removal>

1. Remove the pressure roller attached to the pressure bracket unit with a tweezers.

Pressure rollerPressure bracket assembly

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-24

7.3.2.8 T fence

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left) and (5) side cover (Right).

2. Remove the (2) top cover (Left) and (3) top cover (Right).

3. Remove the (12) ink cassette cover (rear right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (11) ink cassette cover (rear left), and (8) ink cassette cover (Left).

4. Remove the (13) rear acrylic cover.

5. Remove the (1) Y rail cover.

6. Loosen setscrews (7 positions), remove the fence holding plate (64''), and remove the T fence assembly.

T fence assembly

T fence assembly

Setscrews (WS-screw) (6 positions)

Control items for replacement 1. The linear encoder assembly (See Section 6.3.5.5.) and T fence must not

project. (Check it by moving the carriage unit to the right and left.) 2. Run the T fence into the left side (driven pulley assembly side) to assemble

it.

♦ Do not touch the T fence assy. directly.

♦ Wipe the T fence assy. with dry cloth. Do not use alcohol or solvent.

NOTE


7-25

7.3.2.9 Carriage cable 64

<Removal>

1. Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (1) y rail cover, (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right).

2. Remove the (10) paper guide (Front). (see 7.3.10.1)

3. Remove the cable holder (Carriage unit).

4. Remove (cut) the cable tie.

5. Remove the Carriage cover.

6. Remove the cable from the PCB-ASSY-ICB1.

<Assembly >

♦ Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide.

♦ Be sure to insert the hook near the grit roller correctly when mounting (10) paper guide (Front).

♦ Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions (two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can be mounted at the same height to avoid skew.

NOTE

PCB-ASSY-ICB1

Caridge cable 64

Cable holder (carriage unit)

♦ When replacing the second FFC from the top (connecting to ICB1 CN10), attach “insulating sheet (carriage cable 64) U00089236100” on the new FFC. Place the FFC on the pattern paper to make sure of the location to attach before actually attaching the insulating sheet.

♦ For the folded FFC, the location is 5 mm from the folding farthest from the terminal.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-26

The following work is required before mounting the FFC (Carriage cable 64):

1. Lay the pattern paper with the blue lettered (SUMITOMO-C…) surface face-up and place the FFC on it.

2. Attach the insulating sheet on the paper at the location shown above (on the blue lettered surface).

3. Fold the FFC at the ICB1 connection side (see the illustration below).

■Folded FFC ■Mounting four sheets of FFC

15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 10 mm

Mountain fold

Valley fold

60 mm

5 mm

60 mm

Insulating sheet (carriage cable 64)

Carriage cable 64 Double-stick tape

Insulating sheet


7-27

7.3.3 X drive unit

7.3.3.1 Media feed motor assembly and deceleration belt

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), and (12) ink cassette cover (rear right).

2. Remove the media feed motor pulley bearing plate.


4. Remove the motor installation panel.

5. Remove the media feed motor assembly.

♦ Do not lose the spring in the shaft. NOTE

♦ To replace the paper feed motor assy., the carriage motor assy. needs to be removed (see 7.3.2.2).

NOTE

Media feed motor assembly

Pulley shaft

Deceleration belt

Motor installation panel

Carriage motor

Media feed motor Pulley bearing plate

Control items for replacement ♦ Deceleration belt tension: 49 N ± 2 N (5 kgf±0.2 kgf)

=> Section 8, Adjustment. ♦ Deceleration belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-28

7.3.3.2 Adsorption fan assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the (14) paper guide (Rear) (see 7.3.10.2).

2. Remove the duct and connector.

3. Remove the adsorption fan assembly.

7.3.3.3 Paper sensor assembly (front)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (10) paper guide (Front) (see 7.3.10.1).


3. Remove the sensor bracket. 4. Remove the paper sensor assembly (front) from the sensor bracket.

Adsorption fan

Adsorption fan

Paper sensor assembly (front)

♦ Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide.

♦ When mounting (10) paper guide (Front), check whether latches around the grit roller are in the specified positions.

♦ Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions(two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can be mounted at the same height to avoid skew.

NOTE


NOTE


7-29

7.3.3.4 Paper sensor assembly (rear)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (14) paper guide (Rear) (see 7.3.10.2).

2. Remove the connector. 3. Remove the sensor bracket.

4. Remove the paper sensor assembly (rear) from the sensor bracket.

Paper sensor assembly (rear)


NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-30

7.3.3.5 Grit roller

<Removal>

1. Remove the following external covers: (4) side cover (Left), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), (11) ink cassette cover (Rear left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), and (27) wipe cover (Lower).

2. Detach the wiping unit. 2-1 Detach the reinforced board.

2-2 Detach the wiping unit.


7-31

3. Dismount (10) paper guide (Front).

4. Detach the bearing holder.

5. Loosen the screws of the grit roller joint.

6. Pull out the grit roller in the wipe direction.

7. Slide the pressuring part holding bracket and unfasten the screws of the grit roller support block.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-32

<Attach>

1. Insert the grit roller from the wipe side.

2. Secure the grit roller joint.

3. Secure the bearing holder.

♦ Avoid scratches on the grit roller caused by rubbing.

NOTE


7-33

4. Attach paper guide (Front).

5. Attach the wiping unit.

6. Check the blade for its height after attaching the wiping unit.

7. Attach the covers dismounted in procedure 1 of the removal in reverse order of the removal.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-34

7.3.4 Electrical unit

7.3.4.1 Cooling fan assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the (19) side cover 2 (Right) and (20) ink holder cover (Left).

2. Remove the duct and connector.

3. Remove the cooling fan assembly.

7.3.4.2 Power supply unit

<Removal>

1. Remove the (15) front cover (Center).


3. Remove the power supply unit.

7.3.4.3 Board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1, PCB-ASSY-VDD2)

<Removal>


2. Remove the tray. 3. Remove all the cables from the PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1,

and PCB-ASSY-VDD2 boards and remove the boards.

Power supply unit

PCB-ASSY-VDD2

PCB-ASSY-IPB1

PCB-ASSY-WIN1

Paper sensor assy. (rear)


7-35

7.3.4.4 Board (PCB-ASSY-RLY)

<Removal>


2. Remove the voltage alternation switch assembly from the tray.

3. Remove all cables on the PCB-ASSY-RLY.

4. Remove the tray.

5. Remove the PCB-ASSY-RLY from the tray.

PCB-ASSY-RLY

Loosen Loosen

Voltage alternation switch assembly

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-36

7.3.5 Carriage assembly, head unit

• Removing Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (24) cap cover (rear left).

2. Remove the Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.

Carriage cover 1 (with a fan)

Carriage cover 2 Carriage cover 3

♦ Do not contact the fan connector with the ground when removing the cover. ♦ Do not remove the connector with the relay connector attaching.

NOTE


7-37

♦ Use care not to damage the head cable when removing or attaching the carriage covers. <Screw tightening order and torque for the carriage cover>

Screw tightening order and torque for the carriage cover must be managed as follows: • Screw tightening order management Follow the order below.

• Screw tightening torque

management Fasten the screws in the

order of 1->2->3->4 with a 49N (59 kgf) torque screwdriver as shown in the left photos.

NOTE

1 2 4 3

♦ Check that the guide tube groove is set correctly in the cut.

NOTE

Guide tube groove

Cut

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-38

7.3.5.1 Head cable 64

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left) (2) top cover (Right), (24) cap cover, Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.

2. Remove the head cable 64 (see NOTE in 7.3.5).



Head cable 64

Linear encoder mounting bracket

Linear encoder assy.


7-39

7.3.5.2 Edge sensor assembly

<Removal>

1. Open the (13) rear acrylic cover.

2. Remove the edge sensor ASSY.

Use care not to lose the collar under the edge sensor.

NOTE

Edge sensor ASSY

Carriage

Edge sensor ASSY

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-40

7.3.5.3 PCB-ASSY-ICB1

<Removal>

1. Remove the top cover (Right) and (24) cap cover.

2. Remove Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.

3. Disconnect cables connected to PCB-ASSY-ICB1.

4. Remove the PCB-ASSY-ICB1.



PCB-ASSY-ICB1

♦ Use care not to damage the head cable when removing or attaching thecarriage cover (see NOTE in 7.3.5).

NOTE

Head cable 64


7-41

7.3.5.4 Head ASSY, Cooling Fan

<Removal>

1. Turn off the printer while pressing down the key. 2. Remove the side cover, the top cover, and the maintenance cover of

the cap side. (When the printer is turned OFF, the head Carriage is in the cap side and the cap is in closed state.)

3. Turn off the printer while pressing down the and keys. (This operation is to skip FILL CAP which is unnecessary in maintenance while FILL CAP always follows the normal power OFF.)

♦ Replace the head as soon as possible because the ink for IP-6600 dries up quickly. Do not leave the head with out capping for a long time. If doing so, the head is damaged due to nozzle choking.

♦ Adjust voltage after replacing the head.

♦ Always perform the head adjustment after replacing the head. (See Section 8 Adjustment.)

♦ Fill ink after replacing the head.

NOTE

Maintenance cover

Side cover

Top cover

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-42

4. Remove Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3. (The two cooling fans are affixed to the Carriage cover 1. Do not forget to disconnect the cooling fan connectors.)

5. Remove the right and left screw driver guide tubes for the Carriage (head base) height adjustment screw.

6. Remove the screws fixing the head cable board (two front) and remove the head cable from the head connector.

Screw driver guide tube

Carriage height adjustment screw

Carriage cover 2 Carriage cover 3 Cooling fan connectors (two)

Carriage cover 1 (w/fans)

Screw (one, front) Head cable Head connector

Head cable board

♦ Beware of damages to the head cable when removing and mounting the carriage cover (see NOTE in 7.3.5).

NOTE


7-43

7. Remove the head tube on the head ASSY to be replaced.

8. Remove the front and rear screws securing the head, and remove the

head assy.

Head tube

Ink tube

Head tube Ink tube

♦ Ink does not drop from the removed tube due to osmotic pressure. However, when the tubes are handled roughly, ink inside the tubes may spill out. Apply the cap which is attached at the time of installation on the joint at the printer side.

NOTE

(View from the top)

Head screw (front)

Head ASSY screw (back)

♦ Dispose the removed head ASSY.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-44

9. Replace a new head ASSY to the position where the replaced head was and secure the head screws (two) temporsly.

10. Attach the ink tube detached in step 7 to the head.

Head screw (back)

Head screw (front)

(View from the top)

Ink tube

Head tube

New head ASSY


7-45

11. Connect the head cable disconnected in step 6 to the head connector, and then secure the head cable board with one screw (front).

12. Attach cover in reverse order of removal. In this section, only head replacement procedure is expained.

Only procedure to replace the head is described in this section, but ink charge, checking of the ink reaching the head, checking of the ink tube on the head, and adjustments of the head mounting position are required after the head is replaced, and head replacement is completed when the head is secured, covers are mounted and head position is adjusted. See Section 8 for the subsequent head positioning and adjustments.

Head cable board Head connector Screw (One, front)

Head cable

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-46

7.3.5.5 Linear encoder assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left).



4. Remove the linear encoder mounting bracket.

5. Remove the linear encoder assembly.

Linear encoder mounting bracket.

Linear encoder assembly


7-47

■ Carriage (head base) height adjustment procedure

1. Remove the top cover and Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.

2. Before starting height adjustment of the Carriage (head base), move the Carriage to the center of the platen.

3. Insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (round end) at 6.6 mm in the center dent (from both sides), and insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (square end) at 6.2 mm in the rear dent (from both sides) to adjust the height at four points.

Platen

Carriage

♦ When adjusting the head base height, set the pressure roller UP/DOWN lever to DOWN. Move the head height UP/DOWN mechanism to the DOWN position.

NOTE

Carriage Round end 0.1 mm steps

Square end 0.2 mm steps 6.2 mm

6.6 mm

Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (round end)

Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (square end)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-48

4. Loosen three hexagonal screws securing the head assy. to the Carriage, and let the head assy. lower by its weight on four points on the Carriage (head base) height adjuster jigs (round end) at 6.6 mm and Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (square end) at 6.2 mm. Tighten the screws at 35 kg/cm toque. Tighten the screws at the cap side first, then the wipe side and at the center toward the head.

5. Remove the Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig.

6. Insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs again to check that the overall error is within ±0.2 mm. If the error exceeds this range, adjust the height again.

Head assembly

Three hexagonal screws

♦ Always perform "Bi-directional print position correction" after adjusting height of the carriage. (See Section 8.18. Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction)

NOTE

Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig

Head assembly

Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (square end)


7-49

7.3.6 Wiping unit

7.3.6.1 Wiping unit (64)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (2) top cover (Left), (4) side cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (Rear left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (27) wipe cover (OP).

2. Remove the connectors.

3. Remove the bracket (2 screws) in front of the wiping unit (64).

4. Remove the roller (cleaner Sa) unit of the wiping unit (64).

5. Remove the gear cover (2 screws).

6. Remove the wiping (64) unit (4 screws).

Bracket

Gear cover

Roller (cleaner 64) unit

Gear cover

Gear cover

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-50

7.3.6.2 Cleaner (wiper 64) unit

<Removal>

1. Remove two screws at both sides.

2. Remove the cleaner (wiper 64) unit by sliding.

♦ Mount the cleaner (wiper 64) unit with the film facing inside. NOTE


7-51

7.3.6.3 Blade (Wiper rubber 64)

<Removal>

1. Turn the gear manually to move the wiper blade to upside.

2. Remove four screws.

See Section 8.7, Wiping Position Correction.

Wiper blade (wiper rubber 64)

Gear

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-52

7.3.6.4 Motor (wiper) assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the wiping unit (64) (4 screws).

2. Remove the cover (push-in, black) and remove the mounting bracket screws (two).

3. Remove the E ring and the first stage gear.

4. Remove the connector. 5. Remove the motor (wiper) assembly.

Cover

Motor (wiper) assembly

Gear


7-53

7.3.6.5 Switch (wiper) assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the cleaner (wiper 64) unit (see Section 7.3.6.2), switch (wiper) assembly, and the connector.

7.3.6.6 Belt (wiper)

<Removal>

1. Remove the wiping unit (64) (see 7.3.6.1).

2. Remove the E ring and gears (3).

3. Remove the screw with spring (left and right) (1 screw).

Switch (wiper) assembly

Gears

Screw with spring

♦ Do not lose the spring on the screw.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-54

4. Remove the metal plate on the wiping unit (64).

5. Remove the E ring, bearing spacer, and D-cut spacer.

6. Remove the shaft and the belt (wiper) from the wiping

Metal plate

Belt (wiper)


7-55

<Mounting>

●Shaft at drive side

1. Mount the belt (wiper).

2. Mount the shaft with the D-cut facing downward.

3. Mount the metal plate into the square hole (secure one side with a screw).

●Shaft at pulley side

1. Mount the shaft along the groove, and temporarily secure it with a screw with spring.

2. Insert the spacer and mount the E ring.

3. Mount three gears and E ring.

♦ When tightening the screw with spring, adjust the belt tension according to8.8 Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment.

NOTE

♦ Mount the belt with its protrusion facing outside. Contact the belt with the home position sensor.

Home position sensor Protrusion facing outside

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-56

7.3.7 Capping unit

7.3.7.1 Capping unit (64)

<Removal>

1. Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (12) ink cover (rear right), and (12) supply pump cover (Right).

2. Move the Carriage unit to the wipe side. 3. Remove the clamped cable, three screws securing cover brackets 3

and 4 (see the photos below), and cover.

4. Remove the solenoid connector and motor connector.

5. Remove six screws securing the front cover, loosen the remaining one screw, and remove the front cover.

Screws

Screws to remove

Screw to loosen

Cover brackets 3 Cover brackets 4


7-57

6. Remove six pump tubes connecting to the waste ink bottle.

7. Remove the capping unit (64) securing screws(*) and remove the capping unit. * W sems M4x12: 6 screws (four screws have already been removed in

step 5), W sems M3x12 (small round): 2 screws

♦ Waste ink may leak from the tubes. Place waste cloth underneath beforeremoving the tubes. Cover the end of the removed tubes with waste cloth.

NOTE

♦ Mount the capping unit according to 8.10 Capping Unit Height Adjustment.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-58

7.3.7.2 Motor (cap) assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the capping unit (64). (See Section 7.3.7.1)

2. Remove the two screws holding the cover (plate part) and remove the cover.


4. Remove the two motor mounting screws(*) and remove the motor (cap) assembly.

* Screws: TP screws M3x6 nickel (four)

7.3.7.3 Timing belt

<Removal>

1. Move the Carriage to the wiper.

2. Remove the belt from the pulley.

Cover

Motor

♦ Align the phases of the front and rear pulleys when reinstalling the belt.

NOTE

Timing belt


7-59

7.3.7.4 Solenoid

<Removal>

1. Remove the insulation lock tie holding the harness.

2. Remove the connector from the capping unit (64) frame.

3. Remove the screws holding the solenoid and remove the solenoid. * Screws: TP screws M4 x 6 nickel (four) Solenoid

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-60

7.3.7.5 Cap assembly

<Removal>

1. Move the Carriage to the wiper side.

2. Remove the screws holding the plate for fixing the cap and remove the plate.

* Screws: TP screws M3x6 nickel (four)

3. Push the hook on the cap side and lift and remove the cap assembly.

♦ When replacing the cap assembly, replace two joints (cap) as well.

NOTE

♦ Apply alcohol to the hole in the joint (cap) before inserting the cap assembly.

NOTE

♦ Install it so that the hole in the sheet (cap) is in the direction of A. (See the following figure.)

NOTE

Cap assembly

↓Direction A

Hole


7-61

7.3.7.6 Tray (ink) assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove the screws securing the tray (ink).

2. Remove the tubes connecting to the waste ink bottle from the joints (at the waste ink bottle side).

3. Lift the tray (ink) assy. and remove it by sliding. *Screws → P tight M3 × 6 nickel (two)

Tray (ink) assy.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-62

7.3.7.7 Torque limiter

<Removal>


2. Remove the plate cover.

3. Remove the shaft with the torque limiter.

4. Remove the E ring and remove the torque limiter. * Screws: TP screws M3 x 6 nickel (two)

♦ Beware of the D-cut spacer to fall off.

NOTE

Torque limiter


7-63

7.3.7.8 Pump assembly

<Removal>


2. Remove the tray (ink) assembly.

3. Remove the cover brackets 3 and 4 and reinforcement 1.

4. Remove the pump and tube ends from joints.

5. Remove the screws holding the pump assembly and remove the pump assembly.

* Screws holding the pump assembly: TP screws M3 x 6 nickel (two)

Pump assembly

♦ Waste ink may leak from the tubes. Place waste cloth underneath beforeremoving the tubes. Cover the end of the removed tubes with waste cloth.

♦ Beware of the mounting positions of the tubes: Right side: Cap, Left side: Waste ink

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-64

7.3.7.9 Joint (CAP Sa)

<Removal>

1. Remove the cap. (See Section 7.3.7.5)

2. Remove the joint (cap).

♦ Clean the boss on the plastic part side of this component with alcohol when installing the joint (cap).

♦ Apply alcohol and adsorb it.

NOTE

♦ Mount the ink pump rollers so that adjacent rollers have difference in phase at 90°.

NOTE

The rollers should be seeable from the hole at the bottom.

The rollers should be seeable from the hole at the right.

Joint (cap): Push-in type


7-65

7.3.8 Ink cartridge unit

7.3.8.1 Ink box (left/right) assembly, filter assembly (Sa), and pump tube

<Removal>

1. Perform ink extracting on the operational panel and than turn the printer off after completion of ink extracting.

2. Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right).

3. Remove the ink box (left/right) assembly fixing screws.

4. Remove the pump unit from the printer.

Pump unit

Pump

Pump tube

Filter assembly (Sa)

Pump unit

Joint

Pump

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-66

5. Remove the pump.

6. Remove the joint of the pump tube.

7. Remove the filter assembly (Sa) screws, decompose the pump, and replace the pump tube.

Pump

Insulock’ tie

Pump tube

Joint

Pump

Pump tube

Filter ASSY (Sa)

Pump


7-67

♦ Carry out ink extraction from the operation panel before replacing the ink box L/R assy., supply pump tube, and filter assy.

♦ Do not wipe grease spreaded on the supply pump tube.

♦ Use care tie's position for assembling.

♦ Beware of the ink when handling the supply pump tube and filter assy.

♦ Beware of the force applied to the tube when mounting the supply pumptube.

♦ Beware of the grease on the supply pump tube to attach to Insulock’ tie.

♦ Pull out the ink cartridge when replacing the filter assy.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-68

7.3.8.2 PCB-ASSY-INK 2

<Removal>


2. Remove the ink box left/right assembly fixing screws (four screws).

3. Remove the pump unit.

4. Remove all cables.

5. Remove PCB-ASSY-INK fixing screws and PCB-ASSY-INK 2.

Ink cartridge back cover fixing screws

Ink cartridge relay cables Ink cartridge back cover

PCB-ASSY-INK2


7-69

7.3.9 Sub tank unit

7.3.9.1 Sub tank unit, full sensor ASSY, half full sensor ASSY.

<Removal>

1. Perform ink extracting on the operation panel and the turn the printer off after completion of ink extracting.


<Draining ink completely from sub tank before replacement>

Remove the joint of the supply pump unit shown in the photo below. Drain the ink remaining in the sub tank to the waste ink bottle. If the ink does not come out, push the sub tank to squeeze out the ink. (The photo below shows the ink drops on waste cloth.)

3. Remove two joints of the sub tank assy.

Sub tank installation plate

Joint (front, rear)

Sheet (ST paper feed)

Joint

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-70

4. Remove the sub tank installation plate.

5. Remove the sub tank frame.

6. Remove the sensor installation plate. (The sensor plate is also off.)


♦ Use care for handling the sub tank not to drop ink remained in the sub tank to the floor.

NOTE

Sub tank frame (8 screws)


Full sensor assembly

Half sensor assembly Sensor plate

♦ Both half and full sensors have the same shape, but have differentsensensing polarity. Install them to the correct positions.

NOTE

♦ Always verify that the sensor plate works smoothly after installing

NOTE


7-71

7.3.10 Heater unit

7.3.10.1 Paper guide F (with heater)

<Removal>

1. Loosen the fixing screws of the paper guide F (with heater) and remove it. Note that the heater cable is connected to the paper guide F.

7.3.10.2 Paper guide R (with heater)

<Removal>

1. Loosen two screws on the media position regulating plate, and lift the plate.

2. Remove the screws securing paper guide R, and remove paper guide R (with a heater). Pull out the heater cable with care.

Paper guide F Paper guide F Paper guide F

Heater cable

Paper guide rear Paper guide rear

Paper guide rear

Heater cable

♦ Beware of the paper guide hitting the front or rear of the paper sensor assembly, when removing and mounting the paper guide.

♦ Beware of the heater cable being caught or tumbled.

NOTE

♦ Before removing paper guide F, mark reassembling positions.

NOTE

Media position regulating plate

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-72

7.3.10.3 Platen assembly

<Removal>

1. Remove paper guide R (with a heater).

2. Remove the connector of heater cable.

3. Remove the screws securing the platen, and remove the platen.

4. Remove the media edge guard by sliding.

<Mounting>

1. Mount the media edge guard.

2. Mount the platen while taking care of the heater cable not to be caught between the platen and platen receiver.

♦ If the platen receiver is equipped with a shim for correcting the height, do notremove the shim.

NOTE


7-73

7.3.11 Winder Unit

7.3.11.1 Flange

Replacement of section (A) in the illustration below is explained.

<Removal>

1. Remove the flange spacer.

2. (B) stopper shaft appears. Remove the E ring and pull out the stopper shaft.

E ring

Stopper shaft

Flange spacer

Wind (L)

Paper feed (R) Paper feed (L)

Use the same procedures for replacement in the wind (L), paper feed (R), and paper feed (L).

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-74

7.3.12 Dryer 64

7.3.12.1 Circuit breaker

<Removal>

1. Remove the front cover.

2. Remove the circuit breaker.

7.3.12.2 Relay

<Removal>


2. Remove the wiring (4 lines), and remove the relay (upper and lower screws).

♦ The wiring color indicated on N may differ depending on the region. Region Color Europe Blue North America, Japan White

NOTE

N Label

Circuit breaker

Relay


7-75

7.3.12.3 SSR

<Removal>


2. Remove the screws (2) at the secondary side, the screws (2) at the primary side and upper and lower screws (2), and demount SSR.

7.3.12.4 Power supply unit

<Removal>


2. Remove the connectors at input and output sides, and remove the power supply unit (4 screws).

SSR

Power supply unit

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-76

7.3.12.5 Timer

<Removal>


2. Remove the metal plate (upper and lower screws).

3. Remove the socket. Remove the nut with a 5 mm screw wrench.

4. Remove the metal plate attached to the timer (2 screws).

Metal plate

Timer

Nut

Metal plate Socket


7-77

7.3.12.6 Thermostat

<Removal>

1. Remove the terminals at both sides.

2. Remove two screws to demount the thermostat.

7.3.12.7 THRM-CBL-ASSY

<Removal>

1. Remove (15) front cover (Center).

2. Remove all cables of PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1 and PCB-ASSY-VDD2, and remove the boards.

Thermostat

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-78

7.3.12.8 VOLSW-CBL-ASSY

<Removal>

1. Remove the screw with a slotted screwdriver and pull out the volume switch.

2. Remove the nut with a 12 mm screw wrench, and remove VOLSW-CBL-ASSY.

7.3.12.9 FAN-ASSY

<Removal>


2. Remove the nuts (2) with a 7 mm screw wrench.

3. Remove the screws (2) on the surface, and remove FAN-ASSY.

VOLSW-CBL-ASSY

♦ Align the MIN and MAX scales when mounting the volume switch.

NOTE

Align the scales

FAN-ASSY


7-79

7.3.12.10 FAN (EL-BOX)

<Removal>


2. Remove the screws from the front cover. Remove FAN (EL-BOX).

7.3.12.11 PCB-ASSY-DRY

<Removal>


2. Remove all connectors.

3. Remove the screws (4 screws) to demount PCB-ASSY-DRY.

FAN(EL-BOX)

PCB-ASSY-DRY

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-80

7.3.12.12 Flange insulator

<Removal>

1. Remove the front cover and thermostat connector.

2. Remove the terminals at both sides (black and white terminals).

3. Remove the upper and lower fan connectors (4) and remove the cover

(4 screws).

♦ Do not lose the spacer attached to the terminal.

NOTE


7-81

4. Remove the cover (8 screws).

5. Remove the screws at the side (2 screws) and the terminal protecting insulator set.

6. Loosen the nut with a hexagonal screw wrench, and remove the flange insulator.

Nut

♦ Care should be taken when handling the flange insulator. It is easily broken.

NOTE

Flange insulator

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

7-82

7.3.12.13 Terminal protecting insulator set

<Removal>

1. Remove the front cover and thermostat connector.

2. Remove the terminals at both sides (black and white terminals).

3. Remove four fan connectors (upper and lower) and the cover (4 screws).

Terminal protecting insulator set

♦ Care should be taken when handling the terminal protecting insulator set. Itis easily broken.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-1

Section 8 Adjustment

This section describes adjustment items for parts replacement or adjustment in the factory or field.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-2

8.1 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment

If the two-step pulley assembly, driven assembly, or carriage assembly of the Y drive unit is replaced, the steel belt tension must be adjusted.

- Move the carriage back to the cap side and measure the tension at the center of the belt.

- Set the steel belt at the center of the vertical distance. - Move the carriage to the right and left and adjust so that the steel belt

does not move vertically on the driven pully. - Adjust steel belt tension by the tension adjustment screw on the driven

pully. Measure steel belt tension after moving the carriage two or threetimes between cap and wipe manually so that the steel belt fits.

NOTE

500 g push/pull spring scale Steel belt

Steel belt

Tension: 150 g Push the steel belt with the push/pull spring scale and read a value when the steel belt contacts to the Y-reel.

Tension adjusting screws

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 8 Adjustment

8-3

8.2 Head Cover Plate Adjustment

Adjust the height of the head cover plate when the CAP is in up status.

(Adjustment)

1. Open the CAP. (on the operation panel)

2. Move the carriage to the home possition. (on the operation panel)

3. Loosen the screws which secure the plate (for head base pressure) and put bare rings which are affixed to the plate (for head base pressure) to the head cover plate.

4. Secure the screws.

Lift up the head up/down lever before adjustment.

NOTE

Plate (for head base pressure)

Head cover plate

Barerings

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-4

8.3 Synchronizing Belt (Y Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment

If the Y drive motor assembly or two-step pulley assembly of the Y drive unit is replaced, the synchronizing belt tension must be adjusted.

Tension: 41 N ± 2 N (4.18 kgf±0.2 kgf)

8.4 Deceleration Belt (X Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment

If the X drive motor assembly of the X drive unit is replaced, the deceleration belt tension must be adjusted.

Synchronizing belt

Loosen the screws and adjust tension of the synchronizingbelt (Y-Drive Motor Belt) by tension of the plate.

Y motor

Deceleration belt

X motor

Loosen the screws and adjust tension of the deceleration belt(X-Drive Motor Belt) by adjusting position of the plate to left or right.

Tension: 49 N ± 2 N (5 kgf±0.2 kgf)

Adjust deceleration belt tension after removing the Y drive motor.

NOTE


8-5

8.5 Wiping Unit Height Adjustment

Loosen four screws to adjust the wiping unit height. Adjust the height of the wiping unit so that the carriege surface and wiping blade become parallel. If the wiping unit is replaced, the wiping unit height must be adjusted.

Loosen the screws Wiping unit

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-6

8.6 Blade Height and Levelness Adjustment

Align the edge of the blade to the upper surface of the head.

Align the right and left belts to place the blade on the level.

Set the head UP/DOWN mechanism to the UP position when adjusting theblade height.

NOTE

Blade (wiper rubber 64)

Blade Head

Belt

Blade


8-7

8.7 Wiping Position Correction

The contact position of the blade (wiper rubber) relative to the head is corrected.

<Parameter> ±5 mm, 0.1 mm/step

+ : Move to the wiping unit side. - : Move to the capping unit side.

(Correction procedure)

With the carriage at the wiping unit, enter a correction value from the operation panel so that the wiping blade position is at the center of the surface of the head nozzles..

1. Press the , , , keys, enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press key to select # WIPING POS. menu.

3. Press key to select # WIPING POS. menu.

Carriage

Blade (wiper rubber)

← (-) Capping unit side → (+) Wiping unit side

▲MEC. ADJ H. M NTE▼

H. ADJ. RESET

＃ADJUST PATTERN ＞TOP&BTM ADJ

＃WIPING POS. ＞+3.0mm

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-8

4. Turn the wiping unit blade (wiper rubber) gear by hand, move the blade forward so that the blade (wiper rubber) position relative to the head can be visually checked, and verify that the blade contacts the head at the center.

5. Enter a correction value on the # WIPING POS. menu.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to correct the position so that the blade (wiper rubber) contact position relative to the head is at the center.

7. As the last step, clean up pointed ends of the blade (wiper rubber) with cotton swab which is moistened alcohol.

Head


Carriage



This adjustment must be performed when the carriage is at the wipingunit. Do not move the carriage when the blade (wiper rubber) is raised.Otherwise, the head may be damaged.

NOTE

The sheet of the blade (wiper rubber) is attached to the plate with double-stick tape. Use care not to instill alcohol into the double-stick tape.

NOTE

＃WIPING POS. ＞+1.0mm


8-9

8.8 Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment

Adjust the tension of the belt when replacing the blade (wiper bar) or belt (wiper).

When mounting the shaft, tighten the screw with spring till the remaining length of the screw reaches 13 mm.

NOTE

13 mm

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-10

8.9 Cap Position Correction

The cap position relative to the head in the capping unit (home position) is corrected.

<Parameter> 0 to + 5 mm, 0.1 mm/step

+: Shift to the wiping unit - : Shift to the capping unit


When the carriage is at its home position, enter a correction value from the operation panel so that the cap position is at the center of the head.

1. Press the , , , keys, enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press and select MEC. ADJ menu.

3. Press and select #CAP POSITION setting menu.

4. Visually check whether the cap position is at the center of the head.

Head

Cap



H. ADJ. RESET

＃ADJUST PATTERN ＞TOP&BTM ADJ

＃CAP POSITION ＞+4.0mm


8-11

5. Enter a correction value on the # CAP POSITION setting menu.

(Example)

6. When the rear cover is opened and closed, the carriage capping position is adjusted according to the input correction value.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to correct the position so that the cap is positioned at the center of the heads.

8. To reflect this setting, turn the power off and on again or select H. ADJ.→MOVE CARRIAGE→HOME.

# CAP POSITION ＞+3.0mm

Note: If the correction value is 0, it does not work. (Capping is not performed in the sequence.)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-12

8.10 Cap Unit Height Adjustment

Adjust the height of the cap unit using height adjusting jigs.

(Adjustment)

1. Open the cap (from the operation panel or by adjusting the belt).

2. Loosen three outer screws (at both sides) and four bottom screws of the cap unit.

3. Mount the height adjusting jigs at four positions (see the photos below).

Height adjusting jigs

Loosen

Jigs.

Set the head UP/DOWN mechanism to the UP position when adjusting the capunit height.

NOTE


8-13

4. Adjust the height manually. The bottom of at least three jigs should touch the

body.



The head may dry during adjustments. Carry out head cleaning and checkthe nozzle.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-14

8.11 Shield HB Height Adjustment

Adjust the shield HB for preventing mists caused by side wind so as not to rub the platen.

Shield HB

Shield HB

Screws (2)

Make 2 to 3 mm clearance between the shield HB and the upper part of theplaten.

NOTE

Shield HB

2 - 3 mm

Platen

Adjust the shield HB height after “8.8 Blade (Wiper) Height Adjustment.”


8-15

8.12 Initial Ink Charge/Ink Extraction

● Initial ink charge

Charge ink as follows:

1. Press key on the operation panel to enter the off-line mode.

2. Press , , , keys.

3. Press , , , keys.

4. Press key to select the head maintenance menu.

5. Press .

6. Press .

The initial ink charge is required only when the printer is installed for the first time. When ink filling process is interrupted by an error (such as out-of-ink or lever open) during ink filling, do not proceed the ink filling. If doing so,there is the possibility of overflow of the waste ink. Complete initial ink filling with the following procedures: 1. Always replace the waste ink bottle to new one. 2. Remove the ink cassette cover (Rear R), carridge cover so that the

head tubes can be seen. 3. Put “FINISHED” to “INK CHARGE MODE” menu in “H.MNTE” menu of

the engine maintenance mode. When you put “NOT YET” to “INKCHARGE MODE” menu, cleaning is not performed.

4. When ink is filled up to the head, the normal cleaning is performed tofill the ink completely. When ink is not filled up to the head, performcleaning a few times or pump absoption(*)

to fill the ink up to the head. At last, always perform the normal cleaning to complete the ink filling.

(*) : Select “NORMAL” in “PUMP MOTOR” menu in “ACTUATOR”menu of the engine maintenance mode to perform the pumpabsorption. When the ink is filled up to the head, stop the motorby “STOP” key immediately. If the motor is not stopped, there isthe possibility of overflow of the waste ink bottle.

5. Leave the printer for about an hour to stabilize the printing operation. Prints often blur just after the initial ink charge.

NOTE

MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD?

▲INK SETUP▼

PAPER

＃INK CHARGE ＞ALL


H. ADJ. RESET

＃INK CHARGE ＊ALL OK?

＃INK CHARGE ＊EXECUTE

＃INK CHARGE ＞ALL

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-16

● Ink extraction

Extract ink by the following procedure. Enter the maintenance mode from the operation panel and extract ink.

1. Press on the operation panel to enter the off-line mode.

2. Press the , , , .

3. Press the , , , keys.

4. Press key to enter the H. MNTE. menu.

5. Press key to select INK EXTRACT.

6. Press .

7. Remove the ink cartridge according to the guidance.

8. Press .

Be sure to extract the ink after replacing the head. Empty the waste ink bottle before extracting the ink.

NOTE

MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD?

▲INK SETUP▼

PAPER


H. ADJ. RESET

＃INK CHARGE ＞

＃INK EXTRACT ＞

＃INK EXTRACT * OK?

＃INK EXTRACT * EXECUTE

INK EXTRACT END POWER OFF

It takes 7 to 8 minutes to extract ink.

NOTE


8-17

8.13 Nozzle Check

8.13.1 Manual cleaning (the same function as the cleaning in the user mode)

1. Turn the power ON and press , , , to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Enter a password.

3. Press to select the H. ADJ. menu.

4. Press key and print a pattern.

5. Observe the entire print with a magnifier (x10), and verify that each pattern has no missing part.

If image quality defects occur due to a nozzle ejection error during installation or operation, take the countermeasures described below. If these measures do not solve the problem, replace the head.

#ADJUST PATTERN ＞NOZZLE CHK


H. ADJ. RESET

Direction of discharging

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-18

8.13.2 Manual Cleaning

1. Turn the printer on and press , , ,

keys to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press to enter the “H. MNTE” menu.

3. Select “CLEANING” by the or key.

4. Select “NORMAL” by the or key.

5. Press the key to perform the cleaning.

8.13.3 Fill Cap

This function can be performed from the user mode. This function fills ink into the cap to solve the nozzle choking by soaking the head (nozzle surface) in ink for one or two hours. Use this function when print dot off cannot be cleared by cleaning repeatedly.

1. Press the key.

2. Select “SERVICE” by the pressing key.

3. Select “FILL CAP” by pressing the key.

4. Perform fill cap by pressing the key.

Always perform the cleaning (normal) after performing the fill cap.

NOTE

# FILL CAP ＞

▲SERVICE FEED▼

CLEANING


8-19

8.13.4 Discharging ink

When the printer was instable or transportatted, ink charge was performed. If ink charge cannot be conplated successfully, bubble or dust remains in the nozzle. In this case, discharge ink, charge ink again, and check status with the nozzle check pattern.

1. Discharge ink. (See 8.12.)

2. Charge ink. (See 8.12.)

3. Charge status with nozzle check pattern print. (See 8.13.1.)

8.13.5 Cleaning with maintenance liquid cartridge

If an ejection error occurs during installation or transportation or when it is not used for a long time and if it cannot be solved by the above procedure, clean the ink path and heads with refresh ink, charge ink again, and make a check.

1. Perform the service clean sequence. (Discharge ink→charge the maintenance liquid→cleaning→discharge the maintenance liquid→charge ink)

2. Charge ink.

3. Print a nozzle check pattern and check the status. (See 8.12.)

It takes approx. 40 minutes. After completion of the service clean sequence, leave the printer for one

hour or more before print. Print right after service clean may cause print dot-off error.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-20

8.14 Head Drive Voltage Setting

Set the drive voltage for each head. It must be set when a head is replaced.

<Sub-menus> Bk (L) , Bk (R) , Lm (L), Lm (R) , Lc (L) , Lc (R) , Y (L) , Y (R) , M (L) , M (R) , C (L) , C (R)

<Parameter> XX.X (12.0 to 20.0)


1. Press the , , , keys and enter a password (press , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press and select the H. ADJ. menu.

3. Press and select the DRIVE VOLTAGE menu.

4. Press to select a sub-menu and select a head to be set with the or key.

Head drive inscribed on each head

＃H ADJ PAT ＞NOZZLE CHK


H. ADJ. RESET

＃DRIVE VOLTAGE ＃BK (L)

＃DRIVE VOLTAGE ＃BK (R) ＞XX．XV

Read the head drive voltagemarked on each head andenter and set that value.

＃DRIVE VOLTAGE ＃BK (L) * 17.2V

(Example)

Head drive voltage is inscribed.


8-21

8.15 Ink Head Adjustment Procedure

This adjustment (mechanical adjustment) should precede a series of corrections from Section 8.16 (parameter input corrections) when the ink head is replaced.

The ink head adjustment includes:

• Adjustment in the sub-scanning direction

• Adjustment of head slants.

Adjust the installation position of the ink head in the above order. Ink head adjustment patterns are provided for adjustments. Use the resultant prints to adjust screws, etc. This mechanical adjustment is the basic adjustment which should precede the parameter correction.

The jigs listed in the table below are required for mounting and adjusting the ink head.

Ink Head Adjustment Jigs

No. Name Qty

1. Head positioning pin (long): for rear 1

2. Head positioning pin (short): for front 1

3. Head positioning reference plate 1

4. Head positioning adjustment jig 1 1

5. Head positioning adjustment jig 2 1

Ink Head Adjustment Tools

No. Name Qty

1. M3 screw driver (-) (short) 1

2. M3 screw driver (+) (long) 1

When the carriage cover is mounted, it is important to keep the order oftightening the screws and control the tightening torque. Be sure to see7.3.5 Carriage Assy. Head Unit.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-22

● Attach the head positioning adjustment jigs to the new head.

1. Loosen the adjustment screws on the head positioning adjustment jig 1 (turn the screws counterclockwise)

2. Combine the head adjustment jig 1 to the head positioning reference plate.

Tighten the adjustment screws on the head positioning adjustment jig 1 (turn the screws clockwise) until the bosses of the jig1 hit the wall of the head positioning reference plate to make the jig1 as the reference.

3. Mount the jig1 to the new head to be adjusted.

ADJUSTMENT SCREWS

HEAD

JIG 1


8-23

4. Insert the head positioning pins long and short as shown in the figure as the reference positions.

5. Fix jig 1 on the head base. (Tighten two jig 1 fixing screws on the jig 1 with a screw driver ( - ).)

Loosen the screw in the back of the head to the degree that the head does not

rattle.

6. Mount head position adjusting jig 2 on jig 1 as shown in the photos below. (Hang the far end of jig 2 on jig 1 and secure the other end with a ring as shown below.)

HEAD POSITIONING PIN (SHORT)

JIG 1

SCREW

SCREW JIG 1

JIG 2

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-24

7. Fix the front head screw (only front, the back screw cannot be accessed because the back screw is under the jig2) temporally as the head center position.


8-25

● Head installation adjustment in the sub-scanning direction

1. Turn the power ON, press , , , keys and input a password (press , , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press and select the H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.

Adjust each color head with reference to the black head.

Adjust this position.


Head sequence


H. ADJ. RESET

C Y

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-26

3. Perform the HEAD ADJ 2 print in H.ADJ PATTERN.

INK POS (R)

INK POS (L)

LEFT/RIGHT HEAD POS

MECHANICAL ADJ

- VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT - SLANT ADJUSTEMNT

HEAD ADJ 2 PATTERN


8-27

4. Move the carriage to the wiping unit position from the operation panel.

5. Use the head slant adjusting pin to adjust vertical positioning.

6. Align the horizontal lines of each color by enlarging the locations marked with circles in the HEAD ADJ 2 pattern with a loupe.

Carriage

Wiping unit

Wait for 10 seconds after the carriage moves its position.

NOTE

See the vertical positioning with a loupe.

BOSS

VERTICAL POSITIONING ADJUSTMENT SCREW• CLOCKWISE: UP • ANTI-CLOCKWISE: DOWN

10 um / 1 scale 10 scales: 100 um

The enlarged images will be reversed depending on thespecification of the loupe. Blue light will make yellow clear.

NOTE

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-28

7. Tighten the screws and print H. ADJ 2 pattern.

8. If adjustment is not satisfactory, repeat steps 4 to 7. Adjust all colors in the same way.

● Head inclination adjustment

After adjusting the head installation position in the sub-scanning direction, adjust head inclination.

1. Press , , , keys and input a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press and select H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.

Standard

Within 70 μm

Adjust each color head inclination.

Head

＃H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.

▲MEC. ADJ H. MNTE▼

H. ADJ. RESET


8-29


INK POS (R)

INK POS (L)

LEFT/RIGHT HEAD POS

MECHANICAL ADJ - VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT - SLANT ADJUSTEMNT

HEAD ADJ 2 PATTERN

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-30

4. Move the carriage to the wipe position using “MOVE CARRIAGE” from the operation panel.

5. Use the head slant adjusting pin to adjust vertical positioning.

Carriage

Wiping unit

SLANT ADJUSTMENT SCREW • CLOCKWISE: CLOCK WISE • COUNTERCLOCKWISE: COUNTERCLOCKWISE 10 um / 1 scale 10 scales: 100 um


8-31

8.16 Head Position Correction (L and R)

Print adjustment patterns to correct the head position (L) in reciprocating movement.

<Sub-menus> Bk, Lc, Lm, C,M,Y

<Parameter> ±XX&Y（-32 to +31 & A to H）

Integer: In 1-dot unit Alphanumeric: In 1/8-dot unit


1. Press , , , , , , in this order, and enter a password (press , , and ) to go in the maintenance mode.

2. Press to go to the H. ADJ. menu and select H. ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.1.

＃H. ADJ. PAT ＊HEAD ADJ.1 1

▲MEC. ADJ H. MENTE▼

H. ADJ. RESET

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-32

3. Print HEAD ADJ.1.

INK POS. (R)

INK POS. (L)

HEAD POS

LEFT/RIGHT

-23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32


8-33

4. Go to the H-POS ADJ L/R menu.

5. Go to the sub-menu by pressing , and

select a head to set with the or key.

6. Press . Select the polarity (+/-) with the [ ] or [ ] key, and enter the value of the most suitable pattern (L/R).

# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk

# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk >+XX&Y

# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk *+XX&Y

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-34

8.17 Head Position Correction (Main)

Print adjustment pattern HEAD ADJ.1 to correct the position of each head in the main scanning direction based on the black head.

<Sub-menu> Lc, Lm, C, M, Y

<Parameter> ±XX&Y（-32 to +31 & A to H）

Integer: In 1-dot unit Alphanumeric: In 1/8-dot unit


1. Press , , and in this order, and enter a password (press , , and ) to go in the maintenance mode.

2. Press to select the H. ADJ. menu, and select H. ADJ. PAT., then HEAD ADJ1

# H. ADJ. PAT ＊HEAD ADJ1


H. ADJ. RESET


8-35

3. Print the H. ADJ1 pattern.

INK POS (R)

INK POS (L)

HEAD POS

LEFT/RIGHT

-23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-36

4. Go to the H-POS ADJ. menu.

5. Go to the sub-menu by pressing , and

select a head to set with the or key.

6. Press . Select the polarity (+/-) of correction value with the or key, and enter the value of the most suitable pattern (in the main scanning direction).

# H-POS ADJ ＃Lc

# H-POS. ADJ. # Lm >+XX&Y

# H-POS. ADJ. # M *+XX&Y

(Example)


8-37

8.18 Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print positions for bi-directional printing of each head (L) are adjusted.

<Sub-menu> Bk, Lc, Lm, C,M,Y

<Parameter> ±XX&Y (-32 to +31 & A to H）

XX: 1 dot unit Y: 1/8 dot unit


1. Press , , , keys and input a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press to select H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.2.

＃H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.2


H. ADJ. RESET

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-38


INK POS (R)

INK POS (L)

HEAD POS

LEFT/RIGHT

-23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32


8-39

4. Enter I-POS. ADJ menu and select medium to be used.

* I-POS. ADJ values differ according to media thickness.

5. Enter INK POS (L) xxx menu.

XXXX: Media name.

6. Press to select a sub-menu, and select the head to be set with the or key.

7. Press , specify the polarity (+/-) of the correction value with the , key, and enter a value.

＃INK POS (L) xxxx ＃Bk

＃INK POS (L) xxxx ＃Ｍ > +XX&Y

(Example)

＃INK POS (L) xxxx ＃Ｍ > +XX&Y

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-40

8.19 Bi-directional Print Position (R) Correction

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print positions for bi-directional printing of each head (R) are adjusted. The procedure is same as 8.18 Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction.


8-41

8.20 Paper Feed Amount Correction

Select a correction percentage for the initial paper feed amount for each paper to be used by printing an adjustment pattern, and select and enter a correction value percentage with little banding. A coated paper must be used for this correction, and the correction values for other media are automatically determined and input based on the value for coated paper. Using “FEED PATTERN” is recommended for simple and fast adjustment.

<Parameter> 97.0 to 103.0

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-42

8.20.1 Adjustment using “FEED PATTERN”

The pattern figure is shown below.

Always set the winding unit to the tention wnding mode for adjustment.

1. Press , , ,, keys and enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Select paper to be used in “PAPER” when mounting paper.

3. Enter “FEED PATTERN” menu and print a test pattern in “ROUGH (BASE)”.

Pattern print with 99.00% correction value Pattern print with 99.25% correction value Pattern print with 99.50% correction value Pattern print with 99.75% correction value Pattern print with 100.00% correction value Pattern print with 100.25% correction value Pattern print with 100.50% correction value Pattern print with 100.75% correction value Pattern print with 101.00% correction value


8-43

4. Chose a correction value so that white or black lines do not appear in side of (1) lines in (2) area of the below figure.

Use Bk and C colors for adjustment. (2) area enlarged figure

5. Enter “PAPER FEED ADJ” menu and input the correction value selected in

step 4.

6. Enter “FEED PATTERN” menu and print a test pattern in “DETAIL”.

Pattern print with the current value -0.12%. Pattern print with the current value -0.06%. Pattern print with the current value. Pattern print with the current value +0.06%. Pattern print with the current value +0.12%.

(2)

(1)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-44

7. Choose a correction value in the same manner in step 4.

8. Enter “PAPER FEED ADJ” menu and input the correction value selected in

step 7.


8-45

8.21 Head Position Correction (Main scanning direction)

Print an adjustment pattern "HEAD ADJ. 1", and correct each head position in the main scanning direction based on the black head.

<Sub-menu> Lc, Lm, C,M,Y

<Parameter> ±XX&Y (-32 to +31 & A to H）

XX: 1 dot unit Y: 1/8 dot unit


1. Press , , , keys and enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.

2. Press to select the H. ADJ. menu, and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.

＃H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.


H. ADJ. RESET

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-46

3. Print a head adjustment pattern (H ADJ PAT1).

INK POS (R)

INK POS (L)

HEAD POS

LEFT/RIGHT

-23 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -24


8-47

4. Select the H-POS. ADJ. menu.

5. Press to select a sub-menu, and select the head to be set with the or key.

6. Select the fittest pattern from the HEAD POS print pattern. The correction value is marked on the upper side of the print pattern. Press , specify the polarity (+/-) of the correction value with the , key, and enter a value.

＃H-POS. ADJ. ＃Lc

＃H-POS. ADJ. ＃Lm > +XX&Y

(Example)

＃H-POS. ADJ. ＃M *+XX&Y

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-48

8.22 Side Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ)

The distance between the edge sensor and the head (side margin) is corrected by printing and cutting paper in the adjustment pattern (top & bottom). After printing, the distances are measured and the parameter is set.




2. Press to select MEC. ADJ. menu, and select ADJUST PATTERN, then TOP&BTM ADJ.

3. Print an adjustment pattern (TOP&BTM ADJ).

4. Measure the side margin with a metal measure, press , select SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ menu, and enter a correction value.

Direction of discharging 36mm

＃ADJUST PATTERN * TOP&BTM ADJ


H. ADJ. RESET



Metal measure

Specification: 5 mm

＃SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > -1.0mm

Specification: 5 mm (-) ← → (+)


8-49

# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > -1.0 mm

# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > -2.0 mm

Example:

4 mm

5 mm

Print Sample

Print Sample

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-50

8.23 Top Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ)

The distance between the edge sensor and the head (top margin) is corrected by printing and cutting paper in the adjustment pattern (top & bottom). After printing, the distances are measured and the parameter is set.



1. Set the paper set mode to “SAVE” in the REGISTER menu.

2. Cut the paper with a cutter to align the edge.

3. Set the paper.


5. Press to select the MEC. ADJ. menu, and select ADJUST PATTERN, then TOP&BTM ADJ.

Direction of discharging 36 mm

Specification: 5 mm

（－）↑

（＋）↓

# ADJUST PATTERN * TOP&BTM ADJ


H. ADJ. RESET


8-51

＃SENSOR (TOP) ADJ > -1.0mm


6. Print an adjustment pattern (TOP&BTM ADJ).

7. Measure the top margin with a metal measure, press , select SENSOR (TOP) ADJ menu, and enter a correction value.

Example:

5mm

4mm


(Example) Specification: 5 mm

（－）↑

（＋）↓


Metal measure

4 mm

Print Sample

Print Sample


SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-52

8.24 Appendix

●Skew Correction Procedures

1. Check and correct skew according to the skew checklist.

[Screw Check Items]

1) Paper setting

(1) Warp

Check the preset paper for its warp and the paper roll for its looseness.

(2) Flange

There shall be no gap between the flange and paper roller end face.

2) Mechanism

(1) Paper guide F

Check paper guide F for its installation position. The installation height of the guide should be horizontally leveled. If any skew is found in field, first check the media setting state as well as the paper guide attachment state.

(2) Grit roller attachment (screw loose-fitting in the joint)

Lift the pressurizing unit and check the grit roller for its backlash.

(3) Pressurizing roller’s gripping force grip the strip film to the pressurizing unit and check the gripping force of the film. Follow the measurement steps below:

(Measuring method)

Apply a gripping force measurement jig (film) to pressuring rollers one by one. Go down and keep the pressurizing roller. Measure the gripping force using a push-pull gauge. The gripping force should be measured from roller to roller. A reference value of the gripping force is 650 g. It can vary depending upon the value of matte-based film and the surface state. The measurement value should be a value preset when staring up the film.

(Criteria)

The difference between the measured maximum and minimum values shall be within 30% of the maximum value. If it exceeds 30%, increase or decrease a load applied to the pressurizing spring and adjust it so as not to exceed 30 %.

(4) Check the vacuum fan for its operation.

Punch one position on the end face of the strip film using a puncher and insert a gauge in the punched hole.

Size of Strip Film*: approx. W40 mm x L 210 mm(*or commercial OHP films)


8-53

3) Paper feeding status

(1) Check external impact during paper feeding.

(2) Check aerial impact from air conditioners.

4) Miscellaneous

(1) Paper check:

Check that genuine paper is used and there is no crashes or breakage on the end of paper.

(2) Operation environment check:

Check that the temperature and humidity are within the specified range of the operation temperature and humidity.

2. When there is no problem as a result of examination instructed in Section 1, namely screws have not been corrected, check the positions of the grit roller supporting block and the platen box.

1) Uncover the top cover (right and left plastic covers and Y rail cover).

2) Remove the capping unit and the wiping unit.

3) Check the positions of the grit roller supporting block and the platen box.

(1) Platen box position control point:

Apply to X-rail.

(2) Grit roller supporting control point:

Apply to the paper feeding side of the platen box.

(3) Check and correction

Uncover the respective covers and visually inspect the inside from both sides. There shall be no gap among the X-rail, the platen box and the grit roller supporting block. If not, loosen the screws fastened to the platen box and the grit roller supporting block. Let push the platen box and the grit roller supporting block to X-rail, and secure them.

3. When any problem was found as a result of examination instructed in Section 2, follow the correction steps below:

(1) Remove the guide plate, guide plate R and L. Store them so as not subject the tube and FFC to stress.

(2) Remove the bracket to hold the pressurizing unit.

(3) Lift the pressurizing bracket. While lifting the bracket, loosen the screws that fasten the grit roller supporting block using a special screwdriver or ratchet.

(4) Push the platen box and the grit roller supporting block up to the specified position, and fasten the grit roller supporting block securing screws.

(5) Attach the pressurizing holding bracket.

(6) Attach the guide plate and guide plates R and L.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

8-54

(7) Attach the capping unit and the wiping unit.

(8) When there is no problem after completion of steps i through vii and skew check, attach the top cover.

4. When a problem cannot be found as a result of examination instructed in Sections 1 and 2, adjust eccentricity of the grit roller.

Correct the optimum value that varies from side to side after paper feeding adjustment patterns are printed. Incorrect adjustment of eccentricity of the jointed grit roller can generate skew. Any eccentricity of the grit roller at the wiping unit side can usually generate screw. Adjust the grit roller towards the wiping unit side. Adjustment steps are as follows:

(1) Remove the paper holder at the joint unit, i.e. plastic blade attached to the pressurizing roller.

(2) Loosen the two screws that fasten the coupling and turn the grit roller of the wiping unit about 45 degrees.

(3) Fasten the two screws, attach the paper holder and check the paper feeding adjustment patterns.

(4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) and find the point where the optimum value of paper feeding adjustment patterns are equal from side to side. You should turn the grit roller of the wiping unit one side.

5. Skew Criteria

Print two PATTERN3 (3 m in length and 1-dot checkered patterns), and judge skew based on the skew size and print head rubbing. Paper should not be reset until printings are completed. Print head rubbing occurred during printings (2 sheets of paper) should be rejected as NG: Not Good, even if the skew size shall be not larger than 5 mm on a longitudinal standard basis.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-1

Section 9 Operations

This section describes the mechanical operations of the paper transport system, carriage transport system, ink system, and operations of the electric control system, engine controller firmware, and network controller firmware.

9.1 System Operation Overview The roll paper set in the printer is fed by grit rollers and passed over the platen in the X direction. The piezo heads that pass over the platen in Y direction eject color inks for printing. The platen sucks paper with a vacuum fan to adjust the correct gap between the paper and the head. The heads installed on the carriage are driven by the carriage motor (DC servo motor) with a steel belt and moved horizontally. The head position is detected with a linear scale, linear encoder, and edge sensor. A maintenance stage (MS) is installed to prevent stains and damage to the head surface due to drying when it is not used for a long time. The MS protects the head surface by its cleaning with a wiper, suction and capping with the capping unit. Cleaning is performed after printing a specified area. Capping is performed automatically by the capping unit after printing. Ink is supplied directly to the head from the ink cartridge through a tube. The printer has three heaters; a front heater for pre-heating of the media in the for media supply side, a print heater for penetrating and fixing ink under the platen unit, and a rear heater for drying in the media outlet side. The paper feed unit and paper delivery unit have a paper feed sensor and a paper delivery sensor to detect paper jams.

Figure 9-1 Outline of operation

Guide rail

Head

Y direction

X directionRear heater

Paper delivery sensor

Print heater Grit roller

Paper feed sensor

Front heater

Roll paper

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-2

9.2 Paper Transport System

The paper transport system consists of units 1 to 7 shown in Figures 9-2 and 9-3.

<Transport system mechanism (X axis)> (Auxiliary operation)

Figure 9-2 Transport system mechanism (X axis)

<Transport system mechanism (Y axis)> (Main operation)

Figure 9-3 Transport system mechanism (Y axis)

IPB board

Winding control

Sensor control

Servo control

Rotary encoderDC servo motor Lever sensorGrit roller

Roll paper Pressure roller up/down

Winding roll

DC motor

Loose sensor

Paper sensor (rear)

Head

Edge sensor

Paper holder Paper sensor (front)

Carriage

Bk Lm Lc C M Y

Platen

Paper

グリッドローラ

ロール紙

DCサーボモータ

ニップレバー

レバーセンサ

Steel belt

IPB board

Servo control

Home position sensor Print timing

DC servo motor

Platen

Suction fan

Carriage

Linear encoder T fence (linear scale)

Head Edge sensor

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 9 Operations

9-3

1) Paper feed unit

The paper feed unit can perform 2-way feeding of roll paper and cut sheets. The paper feed unit can be operated from the front.

• Remove roller paper and set cut sheets according to the guide line on the front paper guide.

• The Pressure roller up/down lever is used to release the pressure roller grip when roll paper and cut sheets are set. The lever sensor is a photosensor located near the nip release lever on the right side frame to detect lever opening/closing. If the nip is released, paper cannot be transported. Therefore, if nip release is detected, the machine operation stops. If the nip is detected again, paper may be set again, it is used as a signal that performs a paper detection sequence.

• Roll paper or cut sheets are specified from the operation panel. The type of media is also specified from the operation panel.

• The paper feed sensor is a reflective type photosensor installed on the paper feed controller. It detects paper by reflection over its surface so that the engine controller firmware recognizes the paper condition.

2) Drive unit

The drive unit consists of an X motor (paper feed motor), a grip roller, a pressure roller and a lever. The paper feed motor is a DC servo motor for paper feeding, which is controlled by the software servo control unit of the engine controller. When this motor is run, the grip roller turns and transports the paper gripped by the pressure roller. The pressure roller is gripped or released by the lever.

3) Platen and suction fan

When paper is transported to the platen, it stucks to the platen by sucking air through the holes in the platen to prevent its lift and contact with the print heads. There are three suction fans. Each of the three fans can be driven independently of each other according to media width. The sucked air is exhausted from the bottom of the machine.

4) Paper guide, paper delivery sensor

The paper guide is a guide plate that is curved to prevent bending of the printed paper on the platen. The paper delivery sensor is a reflective type photosensor installed on the paper outlet, which detects paper by reflection over its surface so that the engine controller firmware recognizes the paper condition.

5) Interlock switches

The four interlock switches are installed on the rear cover to detect cover opening/closing. When the cover is opened, the interlock switches turn OFF to forcibly turn OFF the +35 V and +24 V power of the power supply unit. The carriage and other drive units are forced to stop.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-4

6) Winder

The printer can print a drawing up to 50 m long (software dependent). The winder is used to wind such a long drawing and is installed on the bottom of the electrical box of the main unit. The winder must be installed when installing the printer. The winder consists of a winding unit (right and left), a loose sensor and a winding scroller. The winding scroller has a paper core at the time of installation. If another paper core is necessary, use a paper core of an used paper roll. Tape paper on the scroller paper core, and set paper so that it moves over the sensor on the right winding unit. This sensor is called a loose sensor and when paper blocks the sensor light path, the engine controller firmware recognizes that the paper is loose and winds it. If the winder is not used, place, the tension bar on the winder unit.

1) Tension winding

The printer supports the tension winding mode winding the media with pulling tention by the winding unit, additionally to the slant winding mode. The following two items must be done to alternate the winding mode.

1. Winding mode alternation the operation panel. 2. Changing the tension bar position.

2) External winding / internal winding

Both outward and inward winding directions can be specified. The winding direction can be selected regardless of the winding modes. Change the winding direction by using the alternation switch on the winding unit. Only when the slant mode is used, the sensor position must be adjusted according to the winding directions.

3) ON/OFF

Set the external winding/internal winding switch lever center to turn the winding unit OFF.


9-5

9.3 Carriage Transport System

The carriage transport system consists of units 1 to 6.

1) Carriage motor

DC servo motor located under the left cover of the printer. This motor moves the carriage forward and backward and controls its speed from the minimum to the maximum value. The speed is controlled by detecting motor revoluations and position from the linear encoder installed on the Y rail. (The ink ejection timing is controlled by the linear encoder signal. There are three carriage speeds:

1) 705 mm/sec (Printing) 2) 230 mm/sec (For maintenance, except for printing) 3) 20 mm/sec (Paper edge detection)

2) Carriage

The carriage is a print unit installed on the Y rail of the printer with a bearing, and is driven by a motor with a steel belt. This unit has a carriage board, six heads, an edge sensor, and a linear encoder.

3) Carriage board

The board installed on the carriage has the following features:

• Relay data, clock, head drive voltage, etc. coming from the engine control board to the heads.

• Relay signals from sensors, such as thermistor output (head temperature), paper edge detection, inside temperature, and linear scale reading, installed on the carriage.

• Convert a differential signal coming from the engine control board to the signal format appropriate to the print heads.

4) Edge sensor

Located at the side of the carriage. The edge sensor detects paper on the platen, the right and left sides, and leading edge of paper, and controls the entire printing as a reference for paper when the CPU on the engine control board detects print start position, cut position and skew. The edge sensor sends a signal from the carriage board to the engine control board and it is detected by the CPU.

5) Home position sensor

Photo sensor located at the home position of the Y rail of the printer. The engine controller cannot recognize the carriage position immediately after the power turns ON, so it is moved to the position (home position) where the home position sensor turns ON to detect the initial position of the carriage.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-6

6) T fence (linear scale), linear encoder

Sensor (photo interrupter) installed on top of the carriage. Since the absolute position of the carriage must be recognized at all time for printing, a T fence (linear scale) is installed in the range of the carriage movement. The linear encoder sensor reads the linear scale and generates two-phase clocks with different phases. The engine controller firmware recognizes the absolute position of the carriage all the time by counting pulses from this sensor. The signal detected by the linear encoder is used for servo control of the carriage motor. Ink is ejected from the head nozzle according to the output signal from this sensor.


9-7

9.4 Ink System

The ink system consists of an ink cartridge, cartridge box, ink supply tube, capping unit, wiping unit, carriage board, engine control board and ink system control firmware as shown in Figures 9-4 and 9-5.

Figure 9-4 Ink system overview

Figure 9-5 Ink system concept

Air dumper

13 Ribbon cable 12 Ribbon cable1 Head

11 CarriageCapping unit

5 Air open solenoid

6 Orifice

Scraper Catapillar

Wiper blade

14 Waste ink bottle

8 Ink cartridge9 Ink supply tube

3 Porous sheet

2 Cap rubber

7 Joint tube

4 PumpAbsorber

Sub tank Ink supply pump

10 Carriage board

FFC

Wipe roller

Blade

Wipe unit Blade position sensor

Tube

Joint

Solenoid

Print Head

Pump Cap unit

DC motor

Micro switch

Waste bottle FFC

SCSI

(Engine board)

(Pressure of the atmospheric)

Filter

Pin connector PCB-INK

PCB-CAR Needle

Ink empty sensor

Ink cartridge

Ink supply pump Sub tank Sub tank

Ink supply pump

IPB

ICB

Ink System

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-8

1) Heads

The heads used for the printer are driven by electrostriction vibrators. A signal voltage pulse is applied to a piezo element to distort it and change the capacity of the ink pressure chamber to eject ink. The printer has six heads for six colors, using a head with 512 nozzles for each color, to implement high-speed printing.

• Drive frequency Each nozzle is driven on 10 KHz, and the ABC sequence is driven on 30 KHz.

Since the print head changes the capacity of the ink pressure chamber by distorting the piezo elements arranged like comb teeth, the adjacent channels cannot be ejected at the same time.

The incoming print data is divided into three groups (A, B, and C) for which ink is ejected in order. Since the basic nozzle layout of the head is 180 dpi, a resolution of 720 dpi is implemented by four passes.

• Temperature control Ink changes in viscosity with temperature, so the drive voltage is controlled

according to the temperature.

• Air damper To prevent damage to the head meniscus by the movement of the ink in the ink

tube due to acceleration of the carriage, a damper is installed to reduce variations of pressure.

2) Ink cartridge

Ink is contained in a laminate film pack. The capacity of each color ink cartridge is 1000 ml. A pack is set in the plastic cartridge (case). The ink pack has a sensor that detects the remaining amount of ink. A memory chip is installed in the end of the pack (near the ink supply section) to store IDs in the manufacture process and store various logs from the printer during use.

Memory ID: Ink type ID (color) Manufacture date Unit record log: Ink consumption


9-9

3) Cartridge box

The cartridge box has ink cartridge slots: three slots for Bk, Lc, and Lm at the left, and three slots for C, M, and Y at the right side of the printer. The cartridge box has an insertion error prevention mechanism, shutter, ink needle, and an ink relay board.

• Insertion error prevention mechanism, shutter Each color ink cartridge has a different insertion error prevention key and the cartridge box face has a slit corresponding to each cartridge. Each cartridge can only be inserted into its slot.

• Ink needle A needle is inserted into the spout of the ink cartridge pack, the ink in the pack joins and is supplied to the tube.

• Ink relay board Relay board that reads from and writes into the ink cartridge memory

• Ink cartridge cover switch Micro switch located under the right and left ink cartridge covers Switch that detects ink cartridge cover opening and closing. When this switch detects closing of the cover after replacing the ink cartridge, an ink cartridge replacement sequence starts.

4) Ink supply tube

The ink in the ink cartridge set in the printer is supplied to the head unit through the ink needle, filter, ink pump, and ink tube. The 20-micron filter that follows the ink needle traps rubber scraps that are produced when the ink cartridge pack is torn. When an ink cartridge is installed, the ink is supplied to each ink pump by an ink charge operation.

5) Capping unit

• Configuration The capping unit is located at the right side of the printer. The capping unit is driven by a pump motor and two air open solenoids. When the pump motor runs normally, it turns the cam, lifts the cap and rotates the pump (suction). When the motor runs reversely, the cap is lowered and no pump operation is performed with a one-way clutch.

• Functions When the carriage is at its home position, capping and ink suction is performed with the pump motor. When the carriage is at its home position, capping is performed to protect the head surface. A porous sheet is installed in the cap rubber to prevent ink bubbling in the cap during suction and suck ink in the cap during empty suction.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-10

• Ink pump The ink pump is a rotary tube pump that sucks ink by squeezing the rubber tube by rotation. The ink pump rotates the cam roller with a pump motor and squeezes the rubber tube to suck ink. The pump tube is always squeezed by the cam roller, so ink does not flow back. Three or six colors are sucked at the same time by turning the air open solenoid ON/OFF that will be described later. The waste ink sucked by the pump is discharged into the waste ink bottle.

• Air open solenoid

The air open solenoid is a DC solenoid, and opens or closes the orifice at the end of the tube connected to the cap rubber with the rubber installed at the end of the solenoid plunger by turning the solenoid ON/OFF. The DC solenoid plunger has a spring, and its force is used to close the orifice to shut out the outside air. Two DC air open solenoids are used to control suction of Bk, Lc, Lm, and C, M, Y. When ink is sucked by an ink suction operation and the pressure is released, the cap rubber is filled with ink. Meniscus is formed in the head nozzles by removing (sucking) the ink. If this operation is not performed, the meniscus is broken when the cap filled with ink is opened. The ink in the cap and the air are sucked by turning the air open solenoids ON and performing a suction (empty suction) operation to form a meniscus.

6) Wiping unit

• Configuration The wiping unit is located at the left of the printer (the opposite side of the capping unit). The wiper blade is used by installing an urethane rubber on a caterpillar belt. The wiper unit rotates the belt on which the wiper blade is installed and wipes the head surface with the blade edge. The wiper is rotated by running the wipe motor (DC motor) in the unit. The motor runs in only one direction.

• Functions The wiper blade cleans the head surface to prevent ink ejection bending. The pad cleans the wiper blade that cleans the head surface. The wipe motor turns the wipe blade.

7) Waste ink bottle

The waste ink bottle is made of HDP (High Density Polyethylene). The waste ink is used to collect the waste ink absorbed by pumps. The maximum capacity of the bottle is approx.3 little.


9-11

9.5 Print Functions

1) Cleaning sequence

The printer has the following cleaning sequence to maintain the optimum printing. Cleaning is performed with the capping unit, wiping unit and ink system control firmware. Flushing is carried out with the head unit and control firmware.

• Manual cleaning Manual cleaning is performed by operating the menu from the operation panel. It

is used if missing nozzle dots are not solved by automatic cleaning that is performed by the printer.

• Automatic cleaning This cleaning is performed automatically during printing.

• Cleaning when the printer is not used (fill cap) This cleaning is performed automatically when the printer is not used to

guarantee the optimum printing for the next printing.

• Interval, time, and ink consumption

Ink consumption Engine F/W V2.** Function Interval Require

d Time Engine F/W V1.** Normal Waste ink

save Manual cleaning (normal) Every operation 3.25 min. Approx.

2.5ml/colorApprox.

2.2ml/color Approx.

1.1ml/color

Auto cleaning

At start of 1st printing after cleaning when the printer is not used (FILL CAP)

3.25 min. Approx. 2.5ml/color

Approx. 2.2ml/color

Approx. 1.1ml/color

Auto cleaning (cleaning mode 1)

When printing history contains 999 or more scans at start of printing


Approx. 2.2ml/color

Approx. 1.1ml/color


When printing history contains 1110 or more scans at end of printing


Approx. 3.3ml/color

Approx. 3.3ml/color


When printing history contains 333 or more scans at start of printing


Approx. 2.2ml/color

Approx. 1.1ml/color


Every 444 scans during printing 3.25 min. Approx.

2.5ml/colorApprox.

2.2ml/color Approx.

1.1ml/color

Cleaning when the printer is not used

After 20 hours since the printer moves to standby, then every 72 hours.


Approx. 6.0ml/color

Approx. 6.0ml/color

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-12

2) Head drive voltage control

• Head drive voltage rank setting The head drive voltage is set for each color to keep a constant density and

stabilize ink ejection. Since the drive voltage differs due to manufacture variations (lot, material characteristics, and processing), the voltage is marked on each head at the production stage. The drive voltage shown on the head is set from the operation panel in the adjustment process in the unit assembly plant.

• Temperature control As temperature decreases, the viscosity of ink increases, and as it increases, the

viscosity decreases. When viscosity increases, high energy is required to eject ink. On the contrary, when viscosity decreases, energy may be low. The ejection energy is controlled by changing voltage. It is controlled digitally. The temperature of the head PZT element is detected with a thermistor, and a specific drive voltage is set and the head is driven by engine controller firmware control. The parameters for this temperature control is listed, and it is different for each head voltage rank.

3) Bi-directional shift correction in the main scanning direction

Print dot position correction function during bi-directional printing of the carriage

4) Head position correction

This function corrects the position where the ink drop hits if it is incorrect due to the head installation position or head ink ejection speed variations.

5) Side registration correction

This function corrects the print start position in the paper width direction. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.

6) Edge registration correction

This function corrects the print start position in the paper feeding direction. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.

7) Vertical magnification correction

This function corrects variations in paper feed amount. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.

8) Dot position adjustment in the sub-scanning direction

The dot drop position of each head is adjusted by adjusting the paper feeding direction of each head is adjusted mechanically (with screws).

9) Head inclination adjustment

The inclination of each head is adjusted mechanically by turning it (with eccentric pins) to adjust the position where the ink drop hits.

10) Head L, R adjustment

The jet timing of right and left heads are adjusted.


9-13

11) Paper smoothness action

If paper is left in the printer for a long time, the leading edge may be wrinkled and cause a paper jam. The paper is discharged when printing starts after the setting time to eliminate such a deformed part of paper.

• Operations When the printer receives no print data and waits a print at exceeding of setting

time, the printer feeds the edge of the paper roll automatically upto the front of the rear cover. (This action is ommitted when the edge of the paper roll exists in the front of the rear cover.)

After receiving print data, the printer performs paper smoothness action (repetitious feed and rewind) and then cuts the edge of the paper roll automatically.

At powering off the printer, the printer feeds the edge of the paper roll upto the front of the rear cover and then shutdowns automatically. (When using the winder unit, the printer shutdown with no action.) When using the sheet paper, the printer feeds out the paper after setting time.

• NONE Automatic edge cut function does not work in all types of paper.

• 30 min Automatic paper smoothness action works after 30 minutes for all types of paper.

Before 30 minutes, the printer performs paper smoothness action before print. (Do not set 30 min for the sheet paper.)

• 1 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 1 hour for all types of paper.

• 2 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 2 hours for all types of paper.

• 4 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 4 hours for all types of paper.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-14

• Selection criteria, paper waste length

Paper waste length Cut Rewind

Parameter Selection criteria Less than

set time

More than

set time

Less than

set time

More than

set time

NONE Choose it when use a continuous print 0mm

30 min Choose it when prints in high-humidity environment 0 mm

Approx. 250 to 400

mm

Approx. 50 to 150

mm

Approx. 300 to 400

mm

1 hour Choose it when prints in one-hour interval 0 mm

Approx. 250 to 400

mm 0 mm

Approx. 300 to 400

mm

2 hours Choose it when prints in two-hour interval 0 mm

Approx. 250 to 400

mm 0 mm

Approx. 300 to 400

mm

4 hours Choose it when prints in four-hour interval 0 mm

Approx. 250 to 400

mm 0 mm

Approx. 300 to 400

mm

NOTE

1. Paper waste length shows paper feed length for cutting a paper wrinkle.

2. Determine a setting time according to condition of use to avoid paper wrinkle. For example, choose "1 hour" when you print in one-hour interval and want to avoid paper wrinkle.

12) Drying time setting function

For media with slow drying time, if the next print is made after ink dries, ink may blur. To prevent this problem, the function provides a wait time for each scan and prints after ink dries.


9-15

9.6 Principle of Head Drive

Head diagonal view

Figure 9-6 Head drive principle

Head structure The head ink drive unit consists of an actuator with grooves that look like comb teeth, a cover plate, and a nozzle plate. The actuator consists of a channel filled with ink, a wall and an electrode formed on the half of the wall. There is an orifice (hole) for ink ejection for each channel. Ink is ejected from the orifice by vibrating the wall.

Cover plate

Actuator

Nozzle plate

Electrode Channel

Wall

Orifice

Principle of Head drive 1 period

Nozzle plate A ejection

(Three channels comprise a group.)

Actuator C ejectionB ejection

OFF waveform

Interactive waveform




ON waveform

Interactive waveform = HInteractive waveform = L

Electrical field orientation


Interactive waveform = L Interactive waveform = H



ON waveform = H ON waveform = L

Firs

t sta

ge

Sec

ond

stag

e

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-16

9.7 Print Mode

Mode External

resolution (VxH)(dpi)

Internal resolution (VxH)(dpi)

Ejection frequency

(kHz) Pass

Draft Draft 2-pass 360 x 360 Pseudo 720 x 720 10 2

High-speed High-speed 4-pass 360 x 360 720 x 720 10 4

Standard Standard 4-pass 720 x 720 720 x 720 10 4

High-density High-density 8-pass 720 x 720 720 x 720 10 8

High-quality High-quality 8-pass 720 x 720 720 x 720 10 8

<Print mode>

1) Draft mode 720 × 720 (draft 2-pass) (Unit: inch)

360 dpi × 360 dpi input resolution is expanded to pseudo 720 dpi × 720 dpi for printing by the engine. (● → ▲, ○ → △)

1/360

1/360

○：1st △：2nd


9-17

2) High speed mode 720 dpi × 720 dpi (high-speed 4-pass) (Unit: inch)

360 dpi × 360 dpi input resolution is expanded to pseudo 720 dpi × 720 dpi for printing by the engine.(● → ◎▲▼, ○ → □△▽)

1/720

1/720

●、○：1st ◎、□：2nd ▲、△：3rd ▼、▽：4th

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-18

3) Standard mode 720dpi x 720dpi (4-pass) (Unit: inch)

1/720

1/720

○：1st ◎：2nd □：3rd △：4th


9-19

4) High-density mode 720dpi × 720dpi (High-density 8-pass) (Unit: inch)

One dot is printed twice.

5) High-quality mode 720dpi x 720dpi (High-quality 8-pass) (Unit: inch)

1/720

1/720

○：1st, 3rd ◎：2nd, 4th ☆：5th, 7th ●：6th, 8th

1/720

1/720

○：1st ◎：2nd △：3rd □：4th ☆：5th ●：6th ▽：7th ◇：8th

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-20

9.8 IPB1 (Engine Control) Board

9.8.1 Basic configuration

Figure 9-7 is a block diagram that shows basic hardware configuration of the IP-6600 printer. It consists of six basic blocks (hatched areas).

Figure 9-7 Basic hardware configuration

Ser

ial f

or

mai

nten

ance

Ope

ratio

n pa

nel

Coo

ling

fan

Vacu

um fa

n 3

Win

ding

SW

C.

loos

e se

nsor

m

oto r

H.P

. sen

sor

Inte

rlock

Pap

er d

eliv

ery

se

nsor

P

aper

feed

se

nsor

Oth

ers

Act

uato

r Le

ver s

enso

r

Hos

t I/F

S

CSI

To P

/S W

IM1

Pap

er fe

ed

mot

or

Mot

or d

river

DC

ser

vo

Car

riage

mot

or

FAN

M

M

CPU

, m

emor

y, I/

O

VD

D2

volta

ge

varia

ble

circ

uit

Driv

er

rece

iver

Eng

ine

cont

rolle

r

Dat

a

conv

ersi

on

Ban

d

mem

ory

Ink

rela

y bo

ard

Ink

cartr

idge

Car

tridg

e se

nsor

se

rial

E2P

RO

M

30-p

ole

FFC×

4

Cus

tom

pow

er s

uppl

y

+36V

/+24

V

+12V

/+5V

Ser

vice

sta

tion

Wip

er

mot

or

sens

o r

Cap

ping

pum

pm

otor

sol

enoi

d

Wip

er

Hea

d co

olin

g fa

n

Car

riage

boa

rd

Ther

mis

tor

sele

cto r

Driv

er

rece

iver

Dat

a &

cl

ock

buffe

r

Hea

d co

ntro

l

Edg

e se

nsor

/ Li

near

enc

oder

AC

pow

er

Con

nect

or c

hang

ing

boar

d

6 co

lors

Hea

ter

Hea

d

Hea

d bo

ard

Fron

t he

ater

Rea

r he

ater

Prin

t he

ater

SS

R

Hea

ter

cont

rol

pane

l

30-p

ole

FFC×

12

SS

R

SS

R

Rel

ay b

oard


9-21

9.8.2 Engine Unit Operation

• Head board (Head assembly)

The head board has piezo elements with 512 nozzles and eight driver ICs, and has six heads for six colors. The head ASSY is connected to the carriage board which relays head signals with two 30-pole FFC cables and a connector conversion board (CNB1H). The drive voltage for the head piezo element is 16 V (set by the F/W according to the temperature feedback). The logic voltage is 5 V.

• Connector conversion board (PCB-ASSY-CNB1H)

The connector conversion board is used to change the head board connector to the connector for the TFC cable.

• Carriage board (PCB-ASSY-ICB1)

The carriage board is installed on the carriage and relays data to six head assemblies. In addition to relaying data to the heads, it has the head temperature detection voltage and carriage internal ambient temperature detection voltage buffer and selection (amplifier circuit/analog multiplex) circuit. It contains the edge sensor for paper width and leading edge position detection (light-emitting diode current can be changed in four steps by the firmware), linear encoder (two phases, 180 dpi), and paper cutter up/down solenoid driver. It also has a driver/receiver IC as the data transfer circuit between the carriage and engine controller.

• Engine controller board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1)

The engine controller board is a core circuit block of the print engine and provides the following functions.

(1) CPU (single-chip 32-bit CPU (SH-2), peripheral I/O, A/D converter (internal))

(2) Memory (SRAM memory (program), flash memory (boot program, system program, test pattern, engine parameter backup storage), SDRAM (band memory storage), IC memory card (program load), NVRAM (parameter store))

(3) I/O (PIO, RTC)

(4) Host interface (SCSI I/F)

(5) X, Y motor control (DC servo control), other motor control (ON/OFF control)

(6) Various sensors/actuator/mechanical switch port control (solenoid, interlock switch, photo sensors, etc.)

(7) Head drive voltage variable control (15 to 32 V): VDD2 board that is different from the IPB1.

(8) Data pass conversion (band memory control, data conversion, dot interpolation, margin generation, print mode, forward/backward print)

(9) Operation panel control (Dedicated circuit: The dedicated circuit for communication with the panel is incorporated.)

(10) Others (Detection of the paper end)

• Service station

Capping unit: Cap the heads and suck.

Wiping unit: Wipe head nozzle surface.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-22

• Ink cartridge

The printer supplies ink directly to the heads through tanks. Therefore, ink only exists in the head internal flow paths and ink tanks, as well as ink cartridges. The printer detects the remaining amount of ink in an ink cartridge by counting (calculating) the number of ink ejections. If it exceeds a specific value, a near-end warning is given. An ink cartridge contains an involatile memory (serial E2PROM) to store and update the remaining quantity of ink in each color ink cartridge. This memory contains ink IDs and manufacture dates, etc. to maintain ink quality. The remaining amount of ink is also detected from the change in the tank shape in the cartridge. If the sensor located on the bottom of the ink cartridge detects ink-out, the end of ink is reached. The communication with the involative memory is performed by F/W timing control through the PIO port on the engine controller board.

• Mechanical control block

This block has a main function of controlling the carriage motor and paper motor DC servo. In addition, it controls and operates the actuators (pump motors, wiper motors, solenoids, cutter motor, vacuum fans, etc.) of the service station and ink supply system.

Motors and Solenoids

Part name Type Voltage Control method Detection Remarks

X motor (Paper feed motor) DC motor 36V Software

servo Overcurrent

Y motor (Carriage motor) DC motor 36V Software

servo Overcurrent

Suction fan (1 to 3) DC sirocco fan 24V ON/OFF Lock detection

Air flow is controllable

Capping motor DC motor 24V ON/OFF Overcurrent Air open solenoid (1, 2) Solenoid 24V ON/OFF

Wiping motor DC motor 24V ON/OFF Ink supply motor (1 to 6) DC motor 24V ON/OFF

Winding motor DC motor 24V ON/OFF

Cooling fan DC motor 24V ON/OFF Simultaneous control of 2 fans

Head cooling fan DC sirocco fan 12V ON/OFF Simultaneous control of 2 fans, Air flow is controllable.


9-23

Sensors

Name Type Sensing method

"L" "H" Cable break

Vaccum fanlok sensor (1 to 3)

Hall element (built-in fan) PIO input Rotation Lock H

Wipe sensor Micro switch PIO input At detectable position

Not at detectable position

H

Sub-tank full sensor (1 to 6) Solid photo interrupter PIO input Not full Full H

Sub-tank half sensor (1 to 6) Solid photo interrupter PIO input More than

half-full Not half-full H

Media end senssor Micro switch PIO input Remain Media end H Stackness sensor Reflective photo sensor PIO input None Exist H

PIO input (1) FACE DOWN Stop H Winding switch Lever switch (ON-OFF-ON) PIO input (2) FACE UP Stop H

X encorder Rotary encorder Pulse contact H Y encorder Linear encorder Pulse contact H Home position sensor Photo interrupter PIO input None Exist H Lever sensor Photo interrupter PIO input None Exist H

Media supply sensor Photo refecter A/D conversion

Exist None H

Media output sensor Photo refecter A/D conversion

Exist None H

Interlock switch 1,2 Micro switch PIO input close Open H Print pause/Restard switch

Push button switch (momentary type) PIO input Push Lerease H

Print stop switch Push button switch (momentary type) PIO input Push Lerease H

Waste bottle sensor Micro switch PIO input Exist None H

Edge sensor Photo refecter A/D conversion

(platen) (Media) L

Temperature sensor (main body) Thermistor A/D

conversion (High temperature)

(Low temperature) H

Temperature sensor (carriage) Thermistor A/D


(Low temperature) H

Head temperature sensor Thermistor A/D


(Low temperature) H

Ink motor sensor (1 to 6) Photo refecter PIO input Ink path is close Ink path is

open H

Ink cartridge detector (1 to 6) Contact PIO input Exist None H

Cartridge cover detector switch (1, 2) Micro switch PIO input close Open H

• SCSI interface block (WIM1) Physical specifications: WIDE-SCSI (16 bits)

ULTRA2 LVDS level (low voltage differential) 68-pin half-pitch connector

Recommended environment for host computer (PC) Adaptec AHA-29160

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-24

• Data pass system

This block receives data from a host or network controller in the engine controller, buffers and processes it into head transfer data, and sends it to the heads. All its functions are implemented by hardware.

• Band memory

The band memory is a memory that is physically separated from the main memory (CPU system memory + work RAM), and is a band image memory area that temporarily stores image from an upstream device. Images can be written directly into the memory from the CPU, and test patterns are generated in this way. Images are written directly into the band memory without passing through the CPU from an upstream SCSI I/F or network controller. Image data transfer from the host computer to the print engine supports three methods: line order, band surface order, and cell order. When a scan starts, data required for a scan is maintained, so it is called a band. Although it is a band memory, image data arrangement in it is different according to print modes (high speed, standard, super high quality).

[Band memory specifications] (1) Memory capacity 256 MB for six colors (2) Memory 256-Mbit synchronous DRAM (3) Power supply voltage +3.3 V

• ATG (Band Memory Address Generator) block

This block corresponds to a gate array. It reads from and writes into the band memory (SDRAM) at high speed. It writes in the scanning direction and reads in the direction of nozzles (the scanning direction is perpendicular to the nozzle direction for this printer). Therefore, orthogonal conversion is performed.

[ATG function] (1) Block memory access (2) Memory address generation (3) Synchronous DRAM timing generation (4) Mirror processing (bit swap: forward path →, backward path ←)

• RSM block

This block performs various processes, such as addition of right and left print margins in each print mode and mirror processing (bit swap) for bi-directional printing, and finally transfers processed data to the PTG block.

[RSM function] (1) Orthogonal conversion (horizontal/vertical conversion) (2) Dummy data addition in X direction (main scanning direction) (3) Dummy data addition in Y direction (sub scanning direction) (4) PTG transfer (PTG interface) (5) Mask processing. Mask scan line or column data according to print mode (720

× 720 dpi, 8 passes, bi-directional printing)


9-25

• Head data transmission FIFO

This FIFO is built into the BRP and located between the RSM and PTG. It functions as an intermediate buffer to transfer binary head data converted to head nozzle arrangement from the RSM to each of the six heads.

• PTG (Pixel Timing Generator) block This block serially transfers the head data converted by the preceding RSM block (data converted to nozzle arrangement) to driver ICs in six head assembly (eight driver ICs for each head), and adjusts timings for kicking ink ejection at a desired timing in synchronization with the ejection timing from the linear scale. This PTG block is physically divided into two chips, PDD and PTC. The head data from RSM is distributed to each head at PDD. The ink discharge timing is controlled at PTC based on the signals from the linear scale.

[PTG specifications] (1) 720 dpi ejection rate (fire rate) generation (2) Fire timing adjustment

A positional shift in the scan direction is set as a parameter for each of six heads, and fire timing is fine-adjusted. Specifically, each fire interval is divided into approx. 16 minutes and a desired time constant is added to fire timing.

(3) Uni-directional/bi-directional printing Bi-directional printing is basically performed. Thus, the change in head control according to the printing direction is set as a parameter, and fire timing is fine-adjusted.

(4) Three-phase timing Control fire timing by three groups A, B, and C, which is unique to the heads.

• Image interface

A normal voltage level differential driver receiver is used as a driver receiver for the image interface for the Carriage board.

• Head drive voltage control The head drive voltage is adjusted in two steps. +36V generated in the power supply unit is varied to near the desired head voltage on the VDD2 board which is mounted on the IPB1 board, and then adjusted to the desired head voltage on the ICB1 board. There are two different head drive voltages; the voltage supplied when the PZT expands (called the ON voltage) and the voltage supplied when the PZT contracts (called the OFF voltage). These voltages are generated on the existing VDD2 board as follows:

VDD2 out channel Head voltage for ICB board ch2 → ON voltage for head 1 and head 2. ch5 → OFF voltage for head 1 and head 2. ch1 → ON voltage for head 3 and head 4. ch4 → OFF voltage for head 3 and head 4. ch3 → ON voltage for head 5 and head 6. ch6 → OFF voltage for head 5 and head 6.

<Example>

The VDD2 board generates higher voltage of head 1 ON voltage or head 2 ON voltage + α from ch2, and the ICB1 board regulates head 1 ON voltage and head 2 voltage.

The head drive voltage is controlled by feeding back the head temperature during print because the suitable head drive voltage changes successively according to the

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-26

head temperature.

• Operation panel

The operation panel is used to input various parameters of the printer and display information. It has a LCD module and input keys. The operation panel is controlled directly by the CPU on the engine controller (via PTG). Therefore, print adjustment patterns are output and various maintenance functions can be executed from the operation panel.

[Operation panel requested specifications] (1) LCD 16 characters, 2 lines Alphanumeric (with backlight) (2) Key tops ←↑↓→, online, enter, cancel, shift (3) LED ONLINE, DATA, ERROR, INK, ROLL (One for INK/ROLL each) (5) Power supply voltage 5V (6) Interface TTL, serial communication (7) Buzzer Automatic


9-27

9.9 Engine Control Firmware

9.9.1 Function blocks

• SCSI / Engine F / W function block

Figure 9-8 SCSI/Engine F/W function block

SCSI I/F

Maintenance SIO

SCSI driver

Maintenance driver

FLASH driver

FLASH Actuators Ink EEPROM Sensors

Sensor

monitor task Ink EEPROM

driver Carriage driver

Print taskSetup task

Operation paneldriver

Operation panel

Abnormal monitor task

Temperature correction task

Thermistor

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-28

9.9.2 Operation description

[Operation description: SCSI/Engine F/W function block]

The SCSI/Engine F/W operates on the WEC and WIMI boards, and controls the engine components, SCSI interface and network controller interface.

The main function block of the SCSI/Engine F/W includes the following:

• Operation panel driver : Controls the operation panel LCD, LEDs, keys and buzzer input/output.

• SCSI driver : Controls the SCSI interface.

• Carriage driver : Controls various actuators to implement the mechanical system printing operation and ink system maintenance.

• Maintenance driver : Controls the serial interface for the maintenance console.

• Temperature correction task : Monitors thermistors.

• Sensor monitor task : Monitors sensors.

• Setup task : Performs various operations from the operation and prints internal patterns.

• Flash driver : Reads from and writes into flash memory.

• Ink EEPROM driver : Reads from and writes into the EEPROM built in the ink cartridge.

• Error monitor task : Monitors sensors and engine errors.

• Print task : Controls band memory and print data.


9-29

9.10 Power Supply Unit

9.10.1 Electrical specifications

- AC input specifications 1）Input voltage 80 VAC to 260 VAC 2）Input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz 3）Phase Single

DC output specifications

No. Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

1 Rated output voltage

+36 V X, Y motor/head drive

+24V motor

+12V HDD

+5 V logic/3.3 V generation

2 Rated output current 7A 4A 3A 8A

3 Average current 5A 2A 2A 6A

4 Adjustment range (pseudo load)

±0.05V ±0.05V ±0.05V ±5.05V+0.05V

9.10.2 Connector specifications

• Inlet (3 pins)

Pin number Signal name

1 ACLIVE (AC1)

2 AC NEUTRAL (AC2)

3 FRAME GND (FG)

• Interlock input

Pin number Signal name

1 INTSW IN

2 N.C

3 INTSW OUT (36V)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-30

• CN1 Engine controller board/RIP controller board +5 V/+12 V output

Pin number Signal name Pin number Signal name

1 +5V (logic) 7 GND

2 +5V (logic) 8 GND

3 +12V 9 GND

4 +5V (logic) 10 GND

5 +5V (logic) 11 GND

6 +12V 12 GND

• CN2 Engine controller board +24V/36V


1 +24V 9 GND

2 +24V 10 GND

3 +36V (motor) 11 GND



6 +36V (VDD2) 14 GND

7 +36V (VDD2) 15 GND

8 +36V (VDD2) 16 GND

* 36 V is divided into two systems.

• CN3 Power ON/OFF control input (from WEC)


1 CTL36_ON 5 PNLSW_ON

2 CTL24_ON 6 +5V_STANDBY

3 CTL12_ON 7 GND

4 CTL5_OFF 8 GND


9-31

9.10.3 ON/OFF sequence

The power on/off state transition is shown below. The main switch is a circuit breaker.

Figure 9-9 Power ON/OFF state transition

9.10.4 Others

(1) Interlock release When the printer's interlock is released, +36 V (CH1) outputs are forcibly turned OFF through a relay. The other voltages (+5 V, +12 V, +24 V) are not affected.

(2) Voltage variable trimmer +5V (CH4) can be adjusted.

(3) Leakage breaker Inserted into both AC line LIVE (HOT) and NEUTRAL (COLD). Rating: 100 to 240V, 15A

(4) Power supply fan A +12 V Brussels UL standard fan is used.

(5) Overcurrent protection/overvoltage protection All the outputs from the overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits are OFF when the +5 V protection circuit works, and +12 V/+24 V/+36 V output is OFF when the +12V/+24 V/+36 V protection circuit works. The output is restored by turning the power ON again.

From all states

All outputs OFF Power OFF state

Main SW OFF Stop

Main SW OFF

Panel SW ON

All outputs ON Power ON state

Main SW ON

Panel SW OFF

OFF

IDLE

+5VON

ON

F/W control

F/W control

+12VON

+24VON

+36VON

+36VOFF

+24VOFF

+12VOFF

+5V OFF

(3.3 V is produced at the same time.)

(It may stop here due to a POC error.)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-32

9.11 Heater Unit

The heater system is composed of a heater panel, RLY board, front heater, print heater, rear heater and heater control firmware.

9.11.1 Block Diagram of Heater Unit

<Block diagram>

Heater AC cable

Printer AC cable Print engine

Power supply unit

(PSU-XW1X)

Inlet

Breaker Relay

SSR

RLY boardSW Front heater

(AC)

TemperatureHeater panel(HCP board)

SSR On/OffZero cross

+5V+12V

Print engineControl board (IPB1)

SSR

SSR

AC

AC

AC

SW

SW

Serial communication

AC

Print heater (AC)

Rear heater (AC)

IP-6600 engine


9-33

9.11.2 Heater System Electric Unit Operations

• Heater panel (HCP board)

Controls the heater system, and implements the following functions: (1) Control of the front heater (2) Control of the print heater (heater for the platen) (3) Control of the rear heater (4) Display of the heater system status on LCD (5) Function settings from switches (6) Communication with the engine control board (IPB1 board) via a serial I/F (RS-232)

[Heater temperature control] Reads heater temperatures from a temperature detecting device (thermistor) installed on each heater, and supplies the current to the heater if the actual temperature is lower than the set temperature (turning on SSR), or shuts off the current to the heater if the actual temperature is higher than the set temperature (turning off SSR).

• Power supply unit

The power to operate the heater panel (HCP board) is supplied from the printer. 5VDC and 12VDC are used. When the printer is turned off, the heater panel is also turned off.

The power is supplied to the heater from an independent cable. When the printer is turned off, the heater panel is turned off, and the relay inserted in the heater power line is turned off. This means when the printer is turned off, AC is not supplied to the relay and beyond.

• RLY board

Implements the following functions: (1) ON/OFF of AC to the front heater with SSR (2) ON/OFF of AC to the print heater with SSR (3) ON/OFF of AC to the rear heater with SSR (4) Generation of zero cross signals of AC with a photo coupler, and supply of the signals

to the heater panel

• Front heater

Heat source to warm up the front paper guide. An aluminum foil heater is used.

• Print heater

Heat source to warm up the platen. A linear heater is used.

• Rear heater

Heat source to warm up the rear paper guide. An aluminum foil heater is used.

• Voltage changeover switch (SW)

Switches voltage according to the supply voltage. Two-circuit system is used internally for each heater.

Two circuits are connected in parallel when the heater is connected to 100VAC, or in series when the heater is connected to 200VAC. Three switches are provided for switching the circuit connection of each heater.

• Leakage breaker switch (circuit breaker)

Shuts off AC when leakage occurs in the heater unit. It is normally used as the power switch of the heater.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-34

9.11.3 Heater Firmware

The heater firmware runs on the heater panel (HCP board), and controls temperatures of the heaters, communicates with the engine board, manages the display on LCD, and recognizes switch inputs.

The firmware is stored in the flash memory contained in the microcomputer on the heater panel (HCP board). It can also be uploaded from the IC card on the engine board.

9.11.4 Heater wiring diagram

The wiring diagram of the heater unit is shown below.

9.11.5 Wiring Diagram of Heater Unit

• AC inlet specification Manufacturer: CHUOMUSEN Model: R-301(00) Input: 250VAC, 15A

• Power switch specification Manufacturer: Nihon Kaiheiki Ind. Model: JW-L21RKK Input: 125VAC/250VAC, 16A

• Power supply specification Manufacturer: IZUMI Model: RS5R-A24 Input: 100VAC - 240VAC, 0.17A Output: 24VDC, 0.3A, 7.5W

• Relay board specification

(1) Function - Turns AC to the heaters on and off according to the control signals from the

temperature controller. - Cuts AC when short-circuit occurs in the cable from the temperature controller or

inside the heater (with a fuse). - Shuts off AC to SSR when the control signal cable from the temperature controller

is not connected.

• Temperature controller specification Manufacturer: Yamatake Model: DMC10S2TV0200 Rated voltage: 24VDC (21.6VDC - 26.4VDC) Power consumption: Max 5W Operating environment: 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 90%RH Storage environment: -20 to 70 °C, 10 to 95%RH Weight: 200g (max) Dimension: 109 × 38 × 110mm PLC communication port: RS485


9-35

(1) Heater control Heater current ON/OFF signals are generated based on the result of comparison of the set temperature with the value input from the thermocouple on the heater, and output to SSR on the relay board.

(2) Operation mode setting - Do not use the loader jack on the heater unit. (The loader jack is an interface used

for settings of this unit from the PC.) - The heater unit is set on the operation panel through the RS485 interface. - The POWER lamp blinks when the power is supplied.

(3) Switch setting - Do not use the loader jack on the heater unit. - Do not use the switch on the base for disconnecting communication.

(4) Connection

• Operation panel specification Manufacturer: Horner Ireland Ltd. Model: SUP0500-01 Rated voltage: 24VDC (10VDC - 32VDC) Operating environment: 0 to 60 °C, 5 to 85%RH Storage environment: -20 to 80 °C Installation angle: ±10° against the reference plane Weight: 320g Dimension: 179 × 111 × 60mm PLC communication port: RS485

(1) Set data is transferred to the temperature controller (Yamatake) when the power is turned on.

(2) ON/OFF of functions and set temperature information entered in the operation panel is transferred to the temperature controller.

(3) The current temperature information from the temperature controller is indicated on LCD.

• Heater unit specification Manufacturer: H.E. Controls UK Power consumption: 700W@110V (finish) 350W@110V (front) 415W@110V (rear) Temperature rise protect: Closed thermal protector AC connector: 2-pin connector, male Thermistor connector: 2-pin connector, male

9.11.6 Heater Operations

(1) Heater operation conditions

There are two conditions for the heater to retain the set temperature:

(Condition 1)

When the ON key on the heater operation panel is pressed for the first time after heater is turned on, the heater warms up to the set temperature even though the 24V power of the printer is off.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-36

Power is not supplied by pressing the ON key from the second time.

(Condition 2)

24V power of the printer is on while the heater function is on.

(2) 24V power ON conditions

The heater temperature goes up as a result of turning on the printer under the conditions listed in the table below. If the auto power save mode is turned off from the printer operation panel, 24V is continuously supplied and the heater temperature is thereby kept at the set value all the time.

No. 24V system operation 1 At time of printer power ON 24V system operates. When the printer is turned on from the operation

panel when the rear breaker changes from OFF to ON.

2. During printing X motor operates. When print data is received from the host. Y motor operates. When test printing is performed from the operation

panel. 3. During edge sensor operation Y motor operates. When media is replaced. When the paper hold lever is lowered. 4. During cleaning Pump motor operates. Automatic cleaning at regular intervals Wipe motor operates. Manual cleaning via the operation panel. CAP solenoid operates. 5. During winding Wind motor operates. When the sensor detects slack in paper.


9-37

(3) Relation between printer operation and heater temperature

PIN Connection signal Connected to:

1 P24V Heater power supply +V

2 GND Heater power supply -V

3 NC -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 TX+/RX+ Heater control panel TX+, RX+

5 TX 一/RX 一 Heater control panel TX- / RX-

6 GND Heater control panel 0V

11 ESSR+ Relay board PLUG F 6PIN

12 ESSR 一 Relay board PLUG F 2PIN

13 NC -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

14 FTP 一 Connector (F) -PIN (Thermocouple)

15 FTP+ Connector (F) +PIN (Thermocouple)

16 RSSR+ Relay board PLUG R 6PIN

17 RSSR 一 Relay board PLUG R 2PIN

18 NC -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

19 RTP 一 Connector (P) -PIN (Thermocouple)

20 RTP+ Connector (P) +PIN (Thermocouple)

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

NC -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

28 RLYOUT Relay 7PIN

29 NC

30 COM Relay 12PIN

Paper guide temperature

Set temperature

Room temperature

End of cleaning

Start of cleaning

End of printing

Start of printing

F/R heater pow

er ON

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-38

9.12 Dryer 64 Operation Outline

The following two elements contribute to dry printed paper on IP-6600 with solvent ink:

Temperature (heat): Heat raises the saturated vapor pressure of solvent and accelerates evaporation.

Wind: Air containing less solvent component accelerates the evaporation of solvent.

The basic principle of the dryer is based on these points, that is, to dry printed paper by applying warm air. Warm air is produced by warming the air with a heater in the dryer. In order to prolong the time to warm the air, the dryer has a structure to let the air go through an S-shaped path. To further dry the printed paper during winding, partition cloth is provided so that warm air can also go round the wound paper.

Figure 9-10 Principal of dryer 64 operation

Printed paper

Heater unit

Air flow from the upper fans

Air flow from the lower fans


9-39

9.13 Electric Configuration of Dryer 64

Figure 9-11 shows the block diagram of the electric unit of dryer 64. The dryer is mainly composed of the parts to turn on and off AC, control board, power supply unit, and fans.

Figure 9-11 Block diagram of dryer 64 electric unit

Breaker SW

SSR

Power supply unit

DC24V

Relay

DC24V

Thermostat Timer

FAN

Electric Cooling fan

Heater

Power LED

Temp. control LED

Temp. control volume

Upper fan air flow control volume

Upper fan air flow control circuit

Temp. control circuit

PCB-ASSY-DRY

Lower fan air flow control circuit

Lower fan air flow control volume

Thermistor

Upper fans (9)

Lower fans (4)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

9-40

9.13.1 Electric Unit Operations

• DRY board ((PCB-ASSY-DRY)

Controls dryer 64, and implements the following functions: (1) Control of air flow of the upper nine fans (2) Control of air flow of the lower four fans (3) Control of the temperature of warm air discharged from the dryer

[Air flow control]

The air flow control circuits for the upper and lower fans have the same configuration. DC fans are used to create a current of air. By varying the DC fan drive voltage, the number of revolutions thereby the air flow change.

When the air flow control volume is turned to the leftmost position, the drive voltage becomes the lowest state (approx. 14V), and the air flow is set to the lowest. When the volume is turned to the rightmost position, the drive voltage becomes the highest state (approx. 23V), and the air flow is set to the highest.

[Temperature control]

A thermistor for detecting warm air temperatures is mounted at the warm air outlet. The temperature detected is compared with the voltage set with the temperature control volume, and if the set temperature is higher than the detected temperature, the heater drive current is turned on (i.e., SSR control signals are on), or if the set temperature is lower than the detected temperature, the heater drive current is turned off (i.e., SSR control signals are off).

• Electric unit

Generates 24VDC used on the DRY board.

• Timer

Turns off the heater function after a certain period of time. The timer has three states: (1) The timer switch is off The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is passed through, and the relay is turned on. (2) The timer switch is on, and the set time is not up The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is passed through, and the relay is turned on. (3) The timer switch is on, and the set time is up. The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is shut off, and the relay is turned off, thereby the

heater current is shut off.

• Heater

Produces warm air as the heat source. A pipe heater with a fin called “sheathed heater” is used.

• SSR

Implements the heater current ON/OFF function to bring warm air to the set temperature. The SSR ON/OFF signal is output from the DRY board.

• Relay

Implements the heater current OFF function with the timer/thermostat.


9-41

• Thermostat

Shuts off the heater current when the upper metal plate of the heater reaches 80 C to prevent abnormally high temperatures caused by the failure of the dryer. The thermostat has two states: (1) When 80 °C is detected The device is in the open state and shuts off the ON signal (24VDC) to the relay. The

relay is therefore in the off state, and shuts off the heater current. (2) Under 80 °C The device is short-circuited, and passes the ON signal (24VDC) through to the relay,

allowing the relay to be on.

• Leakage breaker switch

Shuts off AC when leakage occurs in the dryer. It is normally used as the power switch.

• LEDs

Two LEDs are provided for the dryer: (1) Power LED Lights when 24VDC on the DRY board is on. (2) Temperature set LED Lights when warm air reaches the temperature set with the volume.

• Actuators and sensors

Motors

Name Type Voltage Control Error & action Remark

Upper fan DC motor 24V Variable drive voltage (14V - 23V)

Shut down by a poly switch when overcurrent occurs.

Simultaneous control of 9 fans

Lower fan DC motor 24V Variable drive voltage (14V - 23V)

Shut down by a poly switch when overcurrent occurs.

Simultaneous control of 4 fans

Electric Cooling fan DC motor 24V Always ON None

Sensors

Name Type Sensing method

“L” “H” Cable break

Temp. sensor Thermistor Comparator input (High temperature)

(Low temperature)

“H” Abnormally low temp. Heater is shut off

Thermostat Thermostat Thermostat OFF, heater OFF

Input devices

Name Type Sensing method Cable break Remark

Temp. set volume Volume Comparator input Detection of open, heater OFF

Upper fan air flow set volume

Volume Regulator IC input L

Lower fan air flow set volume

Volume Regulator IC input L

Appendix-1

Appendix

Appendices 3 to 13 show the electric connection diagrams of IP-6600 and dryer 64.

Appendix-2

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-3

Appendix 1 Electrical connection diagram (Power Interface)

Heater panel

ENG-INF cable assy.

PCB-ASSY-IPB1

PCB-ASSY-WIM1 PCB-ASSY-VDD2

★IC(NVRAM)

Micro switch

Micro switch * Interlock switch (far side of Y rail, with green head)

AC cable

Power supply unit

Interlock cable (64)

AC inlet

Interlock

Control

PS-CNT-CBL(64)

DC-CBL-24V/36V(64)

DC-CBL-5V/12V(64)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-4

Appendix 2 Electrical connection diagram (Carriage I/F)

Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance)




PCB-ASSY-IPB1 PCB-ASSY-ICB1

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-5

Appendix 3 Electrical connection diagram (Head Interface)

Head cable 64 (for maintenance) (x 6)

Head cable (64)

Head cable (64)

Head (x 6)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-6

Appendix 4 Electrical connection diagram (Carriage)

★Edge sensor assy.

★Linear encoder assy.

★PCB-ASSY-ICB1

(Edge sensor)

(Linear encoder)

(Cooling fan)

(Cooling fan)

Carriage fan relay cable assy.

Carriage fan relay cable assy.

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

★Cooling fan

★Cooling fan

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-7

Appendix 5 Electrical connection diagram (Sensor) Sensor cable assy. (64) Suction fan assy.

(Wipe side)

Suction fan assy.

(Center)

Suction fan assy.

(Cap side)

(Relay connector)

Ambient temperature thermistor

Relay switch assy.

Cancel switch assy.

Photo sensor assy.

Photo sensor assy.

Paper sensor assy.

Paper sensor assy.

Suction fan assy.

Suction fan assy.

(Cooling fan R in cabinet)

(Cooling fan L in cabinet)

(Relay connector)

Waste ink tank cable assy. (64) Micro switch 2

Cartridge cover R switch assy. * Detection of presence of the waste ink tank

* Mount the joint from outside of the electric box.

Air release solenoid

(K, LC, LM)

Air release solenoid (C, M, Y)

Capping unit

Wiping unit

Motor (cap) assy.

Solenoid assy. (64)

Solenoid assy. (64)

Motor (wiper) assy.

Switch (wiper) assy.

Micro switch (F/w)

Micro switch (F/w)

* Interlock switch (near side of Y rail, with red head)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-8

Appendix 6 Electrical connection diagram (Motor/Roll Up Unit/Operation Panel)

DC motor cable assy. (64)

Motor encoder cable assy. (64)

Internal winding cable assy. (64)

Panel cable 64

Operation panel SII

Y drive motor 64 assy.

Feed motor assy.

Winding relay cable assy. Winding unit cable 64

Gear motor assy.

Winder motor

Media end sensor assy.

Winder sensor cable (64)

Winder switch assy.

(Pressure terminal) (Pressure terminal)

Photo micro sensor

SLACK SENSOR

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-9

Appendix 7 Electrical connection diagram (Ink L)

Ink cartridge L cable 64

Ink motor L cable

Sub tank sensor cable (L)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

Ink cartridge relay cable

Ink motor relay cable

Ink motor sensor relay cable

Sub tank sensor relay cable (F)

Sub tank sensor relay cable (H)

Half sensor assy.

Half sensor assy.

Half sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

* Sub tank sensor Upper: Full Lower: Half L to R: 1 to 3

Motor assy. (SP pump)



Cartridge cover relay cable Micro switch 2 (Cartridge cover R switch assy.)

* Mount the relay connector from outside of the electrical box.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-10

Appendix 8 Electrical connection diagram (Ink R)

Ink cartridge R cable 64

Ink motor R cable

Sub tank sensor cable (R)

* Mount the relay connector from outside of the electrical box.

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

(Relay connector)

Sub tank sensor relay cable (H)

Sub tank sensor relay cable (F)

Ink motor sensor relay cable

Ink motor relay cable

Ink cartridge relay cable

Cartridge cover relay cable Micro switch 2 (Cartridge cover R switch assy.)

Half sensor assy.

Half sensor assy.

Half sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

Full sensor assy.

* Sub tank sensor Upper: Full Lower: Half L to R: 4 to 6

Motor assy. (SA pump)



SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-11

Appendix 9 Electrical connection diagram (Heater System)

AC cable

Heater panel

RLY-CTL relay cable assy.

RLY-B-CTL cable assy.

THRM cable assy.

Fuse (heater)

Fuse (heater)

Fuse (heater)

(Relay connector)

AC inlet assy.

Circuit breaker

AC relay cable assy.

RLY-CTL cable assy.

Relay with relay terminal block

RLY-B-AC cable assy.

Voltage changeover switch assy.

* Voltage changeover switch



Paper guide F (64) assy.

Print heater thermocouple



(Relay connector)

Paper guide R (64) assy.

(Relay connector)

Platen (64) assy.

(Relay connector)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-12

Appendix 10 Dryer 64 electric connection diagram (AC Circuit)

Power supply cable Cable ground

Breaker

Power supply unit

Connection diagram of this side is shown in the next page.


SSR for temperature control

Short-circuit metal

Terminal block

Terminal block

Short-circuit metal

Short-circuit metal

Relay


For OFF timer/ Relay for shutoff at abnormal temperatures

Terminal block

Short-circuit metal

N seal

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Appendix-13

Appendix 11 Dryer 64 electric connection diagram (DC Circuit) Power supply unit

Con

nect

ion

diag

ram

of t

his

side

issh

own

in th

e pr

evio

us p

age.

Relay

Con

nect

ion

diag

ram

of t

his

side

issh

own

in th

e pr

evio

us p

age.

★Timer

Con

nect

ion

diag

ram

of t

his

side

issh

own

in th

e pr

evio

us p

age.

Timer socket

Thermostat

(No polarity) Heat contraction tube

Heat contraction tub

Heat contraction tube

Warm air temperature set indicator LED (GREEN)

Power on indicator LED (ORANGE)

Mold knob

Mold knob

Mold knob

Heat contraction tub

Warm air detection thermistor

(Relay connector)

Temperature and air flow control board

Warm air fan air flow control volume switch

Lower fan air flow control volume switch

Warm air temperature control volume switch

(Upper row, cap side)

(Lower row, cap side)

(Lower row, wipe side)

(Upper row, wipe side)

Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual

Documents

Transcript of Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual